diff --git a/doc/.cvsignore b/doc/.cvsignore
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2916b2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/.cvsignore
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+Makefile
+draft-zebra-00.txt
+zebra.info-*
diff --git a/doc/BGP-TypeCode b/doc/BGP-TypeCode
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0904e19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/BGP-TypeCode
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+		 BGP-4[+] UPDATE Attribute TypeCode list
+
+  Value  Attribute            References
+=========================================================================
+    1    ORIGIN               [RFC 1771]
+    2    AS_PATH              [RFC 1771]
+    3    NEXT_HOP             [RFC 1771]
+    4    MULTI_EXIT_DISC      [RFC 1771]
+    5    LOCAL_PREF           [RFC 1771]
+    6    ATOMIC_AGGREGATE     [RFC 1771]
+    7    AGGREGATOR           [RFC 1771]
+    8    COMMUNITIES          [RFC 1997]
+    9    ORIGINATOR_ID        [RFC 1966]
+   10    CLUSTER_LIST         [RFC 1966]
+   11    DPA                  [draft-ietf-idr-bgp-dpa-05.txt(expired)]
+   12    ADVERTISER           [Changed from RFC 1863 bgp@ans.net ML?]
+   13    RCID_PATH            [Changed from RFC 1863 bgp@ans.net ML?]
+   14    MP_REACH_NLRI        [RFC 2283]
+   15    MP_UNREACH_NLRI      [RFC 2283]
+   16    EXT_COMMUNITIES      [draft-ramachandra-bgp-ext-communities-09.txt]
+  254    RCID_PATH            [RFC 1863]
+  255    ADVERTISER           [RFC 1863]
+=========================================================================
diff --git a/doc/ChangeLog b/doc/ChangeLog
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cfe6e0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/ChangeLog
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+2002-07-07  Kunihiro Ishiguro  <kunihiro@ipinfusion.com>
+
+	* zebra-0.93 released.
+
+2001-02-07  Pekka Savola <pekkas@netcore.fi>
+
+	* Correct bad English ;-).
+
+2001-02-01  Kunihiro Ishiguro  <kunihiro@zebra.org>
+
+	* zebra-0.91 released.
+
+2001-01-09  Kunihiro Ishiguro  <kunihiro@zebra.org>
+
+	* zebra-0.90 released.
+
+2000-10-02  Kunihiro Ishiguro  <kunihiro@zebra.org>
+
+	* zebra-0.89 released.
+
+2000-10-02  Horms <horms@vergenet.net>
+
+	* Makefile.am: Fix texinfo file installation problem.
+
+2000-08-17  Kunihiro Ishiguro  <kunihiro@zebra.org>
+
+	* zebra-0.88 released.
+
+	* ospfd.texi (Redistribute routes to OSPF): distance <1-255>
+	@var{source} command is temporary disabled.  So it is removed from
+	document.
+
+2000-07-04  Kunihiro Ishiguro  <kunihiro@zebra.org>
+
+	* vtysh.1: Add man entry for vtysh.
+
+	* bgpd.1: Change section to 8.
+	* ospfd.1: Likewise.
+	* ospf6d.1: Likewise.
+	* ripd.1: Likewise.
+	* ripngd.1: Likewise.
+	* zebra.1: Likewise.
+
+1999-09-01  "A.Waddington" <waddington@usa.net>
+
+	* zebra.texi: Replace @command with @code until it gets ready.
+	Remove @macro.
+
+1999-08-26  Andrew Waddington <waddington@usa.net>
+
+	* bgpd.1: Add man page.
+	ospf6d.1: Likewise.
+	ospfd.1: Likewise.
+	ripd.1: Likewise.
+	ripngd.1: Likewise.
+	zebra.1: Likewise.
+
+1999-08-14  Andrew Waddington <waddington@usa.net>
+
+	* zebra.texi: Many typo is fixed.  Some grammatical rectifications
+	is made.
+
+1999-07-27  Gerhard Poul <gpoul@gnu.org>
+
+	* zebra.texi: Update zebra.texi.
+
+1999-07-02  Gerhard Poul <gpoul@gnu.org>
+
+	* draft-zebra-00.ms: New file added.  This is groff version of
+	draft-zebra-00.txt.  This is a master file of draft-zebra-00.txt.
+
+	* draft-zebra-00.txt: Generated from draft-zebra-00.txt.
+
+1999-05-07  Kunihiro Ishiguro  <kunihiro@zebra.org>
+
+	* zebra.texi (Top): Add ospf6d chapter.
+
+1999-03-31  Jeroen Ruigrok/Asmodai <asmodai@wxs.nl>
+
+	* zebra.texi: Improve some sections.
+
+1999-03-04  Kunihiro Ishiguro  <kunihiro@zebra.org>
+
+	* archfig.tex, zebra.sty, zebra.tex: Temporary removed due to the
+	description is out of date.
+
+1999-02-24  Kunihiro Ishiguro  <kunihiro@zebra.org>
+
+	* texinfo.tex: New file added.  Automake complains the absence of
+	texinfo.tex.
diff --git a/doc/Makefile.am b/doc/Makefile.am
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee49cbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/Makefile.am
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in.
+
+info_TEXINFOS = zebra.texi
+
+zebra_TEXINFOS = appendix.texi basic.texi bgpd.texi filter.texi install.texi \
+	ipv6.texi kernel.texi main.texi ospf6d.texi ospfd.texi overview.texi \
+	protocol.texi ripd.texi ripngd.texi routemap.texi snmp.texi vtysh.texi
+
+man_MANS = vtysh.1 bgpd.8 ospf6d.8 ospfd.8 ripd.8 ripngd.8 zebra.8
+
+EXTRA_DIST = BGP-TypeCode draft-zebra-00.ms draft-zebra-00.txt $(man_MANS) 
+
+draft-zebra-00.txt:
+	groff -T ascii -ms draft-zebra-00.ms > draft-zebra-00.txt
diff --git a/doc/Makefile.in b/doc/Makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..66e35ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/Makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,482 @@
+# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.7 from Makefile.am.
+# @configure_input@
+
+# Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002
+# Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without
+# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+# PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+@SET_MAKE@
+
+srcdir = @srcdir@
+top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@
+VPATH = @srcdir@
+pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@
+pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@
+pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@
+top_builddir = ..
+
+am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd
+INSTALL = @INSTALL@
+install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644
+install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c
+install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c
+INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA)
+transform = $(program_transform_name)
+NORMAL_INSTALL = :
+PRE_INSTALL = :
+POST_INSTALL = :
+NORMAL_UNINSTALL = :
+PRE_UNINSTALL = :
+POST_UNINSTALL = :
+host_triplet = @host@
+ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@
+AMDEP_FALSE = @AMDEP_FALSE@
+AMDEP_TRUE = @AMDEP_TRUE@
+AMTAR = @AMTAR@
+AR = @AR@
+AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@
+AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@
+AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@
+AWK = @AWK@
+BGPD = @BGPD@
+CC = @CC@
+CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@
+CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@
+CPP = @CPP@
+CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@
+CURSES = @CURSES@
+CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@
+DEFS = @DEFS@
+DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@
+ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@
+ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@
+ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@
+EGREP = @EGREP@
+EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@
+IF_METHOD = @IF_METHOD@
+IF_PROC = @IF_PROC@
+INCLUDES = @INCLUDES@
+INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
+INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@
+INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@
+INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@
+IPFORWARD = @IPFORWARD@
+KERNEL_METHOD = @KERNEL_METHOD@
+LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@
+LIBPAM = @LIBPAM@
+LIBS = @LIBS@
+LIB_IPV6 = @LIB_IPV6@
+LIB_REGEX = @LIB_REGEX@
+LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@
+MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@
+MULTIPATH_NUM = @MULTIPATH_NUM@
+OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@
+OSPF6D = @OSPF6D@
+OSPFD = @OSPFD@
+OTHER_METHOD = @OTHER_METHOD@
+PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@
+PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@
+PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@
+PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@
+PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@
+PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@
+PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@
+RANLIB = @RANLIB@
+RIPD = @RIPD@
+RIPNGD = @RIPNGD@
+RTREAD_METHOD = @RTREAD_METHOD@
+RT_METHOD = @RT_METHOD@
+SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@
+SHELL = @SHELL@
+STRIP = @STRIP@
+VERSION = @VERSION@
+VTYSH = @VTYSH@
+ZEBRA = @ZEBRA@
+ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@
+ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@
+ac_ct_RANLIB = @ac_ct_RANLIB@
+ac_ct_STRIP = @ac_ct_STRIP@
+am__fastdepCC_FALSE = @am__fastdepCC_FALSE@
+am__fastdepCC_TRUE = @am__fastdepCC_TRUE@
+am__include = @am__include@
+am__quote = @am__quote@
+bindir = @bindir@
+build = @build@
+build_alias = @build_alias@
+build_cpu = @build_cpu@
+build_os = @build_os@
+build_vendor = @build_vendor@
+datadir = @datadir@
+exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
+host = @host@
+host_alias = @host_alias@
+host_cpu = @host_cpu@
+host_os = @host_os@
+host_vendor = @host_vendor@
+includedir = @includedir@
+infodir = @infodir@
+install_sh = @install_sh@
+libdir = @libdir@
+libexecdir = @libexecdir@
+localstatedir = @localstatedir@
+mandir = @mandir@
+oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@
+prefix = @prefix@
+program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@
+sbindir = @sbindir@
+sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@
+sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@
+target_alias = @target_alias@
+
+info_TEXINFOS = zebra.texi
+
+zebra_TEXINFOS = appendix.texi basic.texi bgpd.texi filter.texi install.texi \
+	ipv6.texi kernel.texi main.texi ospf6d.texi ospfd.texi overview.texi \
+	protocol.texi ripd.texi ripngd.texi routemap.texi snmp.texi vtysh.texi
+
+
+man_MANS = vtysh.1 bgpd.8 ospf6d.8 ospfd.8 ripd.8 ripngd.8 zebra.8
+
+EXTRA_DIST = BGP-TypeCode draft-zebra-00.ms draft-zebra-00.txt $(man_MANS) 
+subdir = doc
+mkinstalldirs = $(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs
+CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h
+CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES =
+DIST_SOURCES =
+am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR = $(srcdir)
+INFO_DEPS = zebra.info
+DVIS = zebra.dvi
+PDFS = zebra.pdf
+PSS = zebra.ps
+TEXINFOS = zebra.texi
+
+NROFF = nroff
+MANS = $(man_MANS)
+DIST_COMMON = $(zebra_TEXINFOS) ChangeLog Makefile.am Makefile.in \
+	texinfo.tex
+all: all-am
+
+.SUFFIXES:
+.SUFFIXES: .dvi .info .pdf .ps .texi
+$(srcdir)/Makefile.in:  Makefile.am  $(top_srcdir)/configure.in $(ACLOCAL_M4)
+	cd $(top_srcdir) && \
+	  $(AUTOMAKE) --foreign  doc/Makefile
+Makefile:  $(srcdir)/Makefile.in  $(top_builddir)/config.status
+	cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__depfiles_maybe)
+
+.texi.info:
+	@rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9]
+	$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir) \
+	`test -f '$<' || echo '$(srcdir)/'`$< -o $@
+
+.texi.dvi:
+	TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
+	MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \
+	$(TEXI2DVI) `test -f '$<' || echo '$(srcdir)/'`$<
+
+.texi.pdf:
+	TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
+	MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \
+	$(TEXI2PDF) `test -f '$<' || echo '$(srcdir)/'`$<
+zebra.info: zebra.texi $(zebra_TEXINFOS)
+zebra.dvi: zebra.texi $(zebra_TEXINFOS)
+zebra.pdf: zebra.texi $(zebra_TEXINFOS)
+TEXI2DVI = texi2dvi
+
+TEXI2PDF = $(TEXI2DVI) --pdf --batch
+DVIPS = dvips
+.dvi.ps:
+	$(DVIPS) $< -o $@
+
+uninstall-info-am:
+	$(PRE_UNINSTALL)
+	@if (install-info --version && \
+	     install-info --version | grep -i -v debian) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \
+	  list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
+	  for file in $$list; do \
+	    echo " install-info --info-dir=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir) --remove $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$file"; \
+	    install-info --info-dir=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir) --remove $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$file; \
+	  done; \
+	else :; fi
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
+	for file in $$list; do \
+	  (if cd $(DESTDIR)$(infodir); then \
+	     echo " rm -f $$file $$file-[0-9] $$file-[0-9][0-9])"; \
+	     rm -f $$file $$file-[0-9] $$file-[0-9][0-9]; \
+	   else :; fi); \
+	done
+
+dist-info: $(INFO_DEPS)
+	list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
+	for base in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f $$base; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
+	  for file in $$d/$$base*; do \
+	    relfile=`expr "$$file" : "$$d/\(.*\)"`; \
+	    test -f $(distdir)/$$relfile || \
+	      cp -p $$file $(distdir)/$$relfile; \
+	  done; \
+	done
+
+mostlyclean-aminfo:
+	-rm -f zebra.aux zebra.cp zebra.cps zebra.fn zebra.ky zebra.log zebra.op \
+	  zebra.pg zebra.tmp zebra.toc zebra.tp zebra.vr zebra.dvi \
+	  zebra.pdf zebra.ps
+
+maintainer-clean-aminfo:
+	list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; for i in $$list; do \
+	  rm -f $$i; \
+	  if test "`echo $$i-[0-9]*`" != "$$i-[0-9]*"; then \
+	    rm -f $$i-[0-9]*; \
+	  fi; \
+	done
+
+man1dir = $(mandir)/man1
+install-man1: $(man1_MANS) $(man_MANS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)
+	@list='$(man1_MANS) $(dist_man1_MANS) $(nodist_man1_MANS)'; \
+	l2='$(man_MANS) $(dist_man_MANS) $(nodist_man_MANS)'; \
+	for i in $$l2; do \
+	  case "$$i" in \
+	    *.1*) list="$$list $$i" ;; \
+	  esac; \
+	done; \
+	for i in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f $(srcdir)/$$i; then file=$(srcdir)/$$i; \
+	  else file=$$i; fi; \
+	  ext=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/^.*\\.//'`; \
+	  case "$$ext" in \
+	    1*) ;; \
+	    *) ext='1' ;; \
+	  esac; \
+	  inst=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/\\.[0-9a-z]*$$//'`; \
+	  inst=`echo $$inst | sed -e 's/^.*\///'`; \
+	  inst=`echo $$inst | sed '$(transform)'`.$$ext; \
+	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst"; \
+	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst; \
+	done
+uninstall-man1:
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(man1_MANS) $(dist_man1_MANS) $(nodist_man1_MANS)'; \
+	l2='$(man_MANS) $(dist_man_MANS) $(nodist_man_MANS)'; \
+	for i in $$l2; do \
+	  case "$$i" in \
+	    *.1*) list="$$list $$i" ;; \
+	  esac; \
+	done; \
+	for i in $$list; do \
+	  ext=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/^.*\\.//'`; \
+	  inst=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/\\.[0-9a-z]*$$//'`; \
+	  inst=`echo $$inst | sed -e 's/^.*\///'`; \
+	  inst=`echo $$inst | sed '$(transform)'`.$$ext; \
+	  echo " rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst"; \
+	  rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst; \
+	done
+
+man8dir = $(mandir)/man8
+install-man8: $(man8_MANS) $(man_MANS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)
+	@list='$(man8_MANS) $(dist_man8_MANS) $(nodist_man8_MANS)'; \
+	l2='$(man_MANS) $(dist_man_MANS) $(nodist_man_MANS)'; \
+	for i in $$l2; do \
+	  case "$$i" in \
+	    *.8*) list="$$list $$i" ;; \
+	  esac; \
+	done; \
+	for i in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f $(srcdir)/$$i; then file=$(srcdir)/$$i; \
+	  else file=$$i; fi; \
+	  ext=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/^.*\\.//'`; \
+	  case "$$ext" in \
+	    8*) ;; \
+	    *) ext='8' ;; \
+	  esac; \
+	  inst=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/\\.[0-9a-z]*$$//'`; \
+	  inst=`echo $$inst | sed -e 's/^.*\///'`; \
+	  inst=`echo $$inst | sed '$(transform)'`.$$ext; \
+	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)/$$inst"; \
+	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)/$$inst; \
+	done
+uninstall-man8:
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(man8_MANS) $(dist_man8_MANS) $(nodist_man8_MANS)'; \
+	l2='$(man_MANS) $(dist_man_MANS) $(nodist_man_MANS)'; \
+	for i in $$l2; do \
+	  case "$$i" in \
+	    *.8*) list="$$list $$i" ;; \
+	  esac; \
+	done; \
+	for i in $$list; do \
+	  ext=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/^.*\\.//'`; \
+	  inst=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/\\.[0-9a-z]*$$//'`; \
+	  inst=`echo $$inst | sed -e 's/^.*\///'`; \
+	  inst=`echo $$inst | sed '$(transform)'`.$$ext; \
+	  echo " rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)/$$inst"; \
+	  rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)/$$inst; \
+	done
+tags: TAGS
+TAGS:
+
+ctags: CTAGS
+CTAGS:
+
+DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST)
+
+top_distdir = ..
+distdir = $(top_distdir)/$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)
+
+distdir: $(DISTFILES)
+	@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \
+	list='$(DISTFILES)'; for file in $$list; do \
+	  case $$file in \
+	    $(srcdir)/*) file=`echo "$$file" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
+	  esac; \
+	  if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
+	  dir=`echo "$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \
+	  if test "$$dir" != "$$file" && test "$$dir" != "."; then \
+	    dir="/$$dir"; \
+	    $(mkinstalldirs) "$(distdir)$$dir"; \
+	  else \
+	    dir=''; \
+	  fi; \
+	  if test -d $$d/$$file; then \
+	    if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \
+	      cp -pR $(srcdir)/$$file $(distdir)$$dir || exit 1; \
+	    fi; \
+	    cp -pR $$d/$$file $(distdir)$$dir || exit 1; \
+	  else \
+	    test -f $(distdir)/$$file \
+	    || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file \
+	    || exit 1; \
+	  fi; \
+	done
+	$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \
+	  top_distdir="$(top_distdir)" distdir="$(distdir)" \
+	  dist-info
+check-am: all-am
+check: check-am
+all-am: Makefile $(INFO_DEPS) $(MANS)
+
+installdirs:
+	$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir) $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir) $(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)
+
+install: install-am
+install-exec: install-exec-am
+install-data: install-data-am
+uninstall: uninstall-am
+
+install-am: all-am
+	@$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am
+
+installcheck: installcheck-am
+install-strip:
+	$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \
+	  INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \
+	  `test -z '$(STRIP)' || \
+	    echo "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'"` install
+mostlyclean-generic:
+
+clean-generic:
+
+distclean-generic:
+	-rm -f Makefile $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)
+
+maintainer-clean-generic:
+	@echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use"
+	@echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild."
+clean: clean-am
+
+clean-am: clean-generic mostlyclean-am
+
+distclean: distclean-am
+
+distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic
+
+dvi: dvi-am
+
+dvi-am: $(DVIS)
+
+info: info-am
+
+info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
+
+install-data-am: install-info-am install-man
+
+install-exec-am:
+
+install-info: install-info-am
+
+install-info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)
+	@list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
+	for file in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
+	  for ifile in echo $$d/$$file $$d/$$file-[0-9] $$d/$$file-[0-9][0-9]; do \
+	    if test -f $$ifile; then \
+	      relfile=`expr "$$ifile" : "$$d/\(.*\)"`; \
+	      echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$ifile $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile"; \
+	      $(INSTALL_DATA) $$ifile $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile; \
+	    else : ; fi; \
+	  done; \
+	done
+	@$(POST_INSTALL)
+	@if (install-info --version && \
+	     install-info --version | grep -i -v debian) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \
+	  list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
+	  for file in $$list; do \
+	    echo " install-info --info-dir=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$file";\
+	    install-info --info-dir=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$file || :;\
+	  done; \
+	else : ; fi
+install-man: install-man1 install-man8
+
+installcheck-am:
+
+maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am
+
+maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-aminfo \
+	maintainer-clean-generic
+
+mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am
+
+mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-generic
+
+pdf: pdf-am
+
+pdf-am: $(PDFS)
+
+ps: ps-am
+
+ps-am: $(PSS)
+
+uninstall-am: uninstall-info-am uninstall-man
+
+uninstall-man: uninstall-man1 uninstall-man8
+
+.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic dist-info \
+	distclean distclean-generic distdir dvi dvi-am info info-am \
+	install install-am install-data install-data-am install-exec \
+	install-exec-am install-info install-info-am install-man \
+	install-man1 install-man8 install-strip installcheck \
+	installcheck-am installdirs maintainer-clean \
+	maintainer-clean-aminfo maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean \
+	mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-generic pdf pdf-am ps ps-am \
+	uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-info-am uninstall-man \
+	uninstall-man1 uninstall-man8
+
+
+draft-zebra-00.txt:
+	groff -T ascii -ms draft-zebra-00.ms > draft-zebra-00.txt
+# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables.
+# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded.
+.NOEXPORT:
diff --git a/doc/appendix.texi b/doc/appendix.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a052bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/appendix.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+@node  Packet Binary Dump Format, , Zebra Protocol, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@appendix Packet Binary Dump Format
+
+  Zebra can dump routing protocol packet into file with a binary format
+(@pxref{Dump BGP packets and table}).
+
+  It seems to be better that we share the MRT's header format for
+backward compatibility with MRT's dump logs. We should also define the
+binary format excluding the header, because we must support both IP
+v4 and v6 addresses as socket addresses and / or routing entries.
+
+  In the last meeting, we discussed to have a version field in the
+header. But Masaki told us that we can define new `type' value rather
+than having a `version' field, and it seems to be better because we
+don't need to change header format.
+
+  Here is the common header format. This is same as that of MRT.
+
+@example
+@group
+0                   1                   2                   3
+0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                              Time                             |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|             Type              |            Subtype            |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                             Length                            |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+@end group
+@end example
+
+  If `type' is PROTOCOL_BGP4MP, `subtype' is BGP4MP_STATE_CHANGE, and
+Address Family == IP (version 4)
+
+@example
+@group
+ 0                   1                   2                   3
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|        Source AS number       |     Destination AS number     |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|        Interface Index        |      Address Family           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Source IP address                      |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                     Destination IP address                    |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|            Old State          |           New State           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+@end group
+@end example
+
+Where State is the value defined in RFC1771.
+
+If `type' is PROTOCOL_BGP4MP, `subtype' is BGP4MP_STATE_CHANGE,
+and Address Family == IP version 6
+
+@example
+@group
+ 0                   1                   2                   3
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|        Source AS number       |     Destination AS number     |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|        Interface Index        |      Address Family           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Source IP address                      |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Source IP address (Cont'd)             |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Source IP address (Cont'd)             |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Source IP address (Cont'd)             |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                     Destination IP address                    |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                     Destination IP address (Cont'd)           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                     Destination IP address (Cont'd)           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                     Destination IP address (Cont'd)           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|            Old State          |           New State           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+@end group
+@end example
+
+If `type' is PROTOCOL_BGP4MP, `subtype' is BGP4MP_MESSAGE,
+and Address Family == IP (version 4)
+
+@example
+@group
+ 0                   1                   2                   3
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|        Source AS number       |     Destination AS number     |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|        Interface Index        |      Address Family           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Source IP address                      |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                     Destination IP address                    |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                       BGP Message Packet                      |
+|                                                               |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+@end group
+@end example
+
+Where BGP Message Packet is the whole contents of the
+BGP4 message including header portion.
+
+If `type' is PROTOCOL_BGP4MP, `subtype' is BGP4MP_MESSAGE,
+and Address Family == IP version 6
+
+@example
+@group
+ 0                   1                   2                   3
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|        Source AS number       |     Destination AS number     |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|        Interface Index        |      Address Family           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Source IP address                      |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Source IP address (Cont'd)             |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Source IP address (Cont'd)             |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Source IP address (Cont'd)             |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                     Destination IP address                    |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                     Destination IP address (Cont'd)           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                     Destination IP address (Cont'd)           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                     Destination IP address (Cont'd)           |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                       BGP Message Packet                      |
+|                                                               |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+@end group
+@end example
+
+If `type' is PROTOCOL_BGP4MP, `subtype' is BGP4MP_ENTRY,
+and Address Family == IP (version 4)
+
+@example
+@group
+ 0                   1                   2                   3
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|            View #             |            Status             |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Time Last Change                       |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|       Address Family          |    SAFI       | Next-Hop-Len  |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Next Hop Address                       |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+| Prefix Length |             Address Prefix [variable]         |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|       Attribute Length        |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|      BGP Attribute [variable length]    			|
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+@end group
+@end example
+
+If `type' is PROTOCOL_BGP4MP, `subtype' is BGP4MP_ENTRY,
+and Address Family == IP version 6
+
+@example
+@group
+ 0                   1                   2                   3
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|            View #             |            Status             |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Time Last Change                       |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|       Address Family          |    SAFI       | Next-Hop-Len  |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Next Hop Address                       |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Next Hop Address (Cont'd)              |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Next Hop Address (Cont'd)              |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Next Hop Address (Cont'd)              |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+| Prefix Length |             Address Prefix [variable]         |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|     Address Prefix (cont'd) [variable]        |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|       Attribute Length        |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|      BGP Attribute [variable length]    			    |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+@end group
+@end example
+
+	BGP4 Attribute must not contain MP_UNREACH_NLRI.
+	If BGP Attribute has MP_REACH_NLRI field, it must has
+	zero length NLRI, e.g., MP_REACH_NLRI has only Address
+	Family, SAFI and next-hop values.
+
+If `type' is PROTOCOL_BGP4MP and `subtype' is BGP4MP_SNAPSHOT,
+
+@example
+@group
+ 0                   1                   2                   3
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|           View #              |       File Name [variable]    |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+@end group
+@end example
+
+    The file specified in "File Name" contains all routing entries,
+    which are in the format of ``subtype == BGP4MP_ENTRY''.
+
+@example
+@group
+Constants:
+  /* type value */
+  #define MSG_PROTOCOL_BGP4MP 16
+  /* subtype value */
+  #define BGP4MP_STATE_CHANGE 0
+  #define BGP4MP_MESSAGE 1
+  #define BGP4MP_ENTRY 2
+  #define BGP4MP_SNAPSHOT 3
+@end group
+@end example
diff --git a/doc/basic.texi b/doc/basic.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8812b78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/basic.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,510 @@
+@node Basic commands
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Basic commands
+
+There are five routing daemons in use, and there is one manager daemon.
+These daemons may be located on separate machines from the manager
+daemon.  Each of these daemons will listen on a particular port for
+incoming VTY connections.  The routing daemons are:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @command{ripd}, @command{ripngd}, @command{ospfd}, @command{ospf6d}, @command{bgpd}
+@item @command{zebra}
+@end itemize
+
+The following sections discuss commands common to all the routing
+daemons.
+
+@menu
+* Config Commands::             Commands used in config files
+* Common Invocation Options::   Starting the daemons
+* Virtual Terminal Interfaces::  Interacting with the daemons
+@end menu
+
+
+
+@node Config Commands, Common Invocation Options, Basic commands, Basic commands
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Config Commands
+
+@cindex Configuration files for running the software
+@c A -not configuration files for installing the software
+@cindex Files for running configurations
+@cindex Modifying the herd's behavior
+@cindex Getting the herd running
+
+
+@menu
+* Basic Config Commands::       Some of the generic config commands
+* Sample Config File::          An example config file
+@end menu
+
+
+In a config file, you can write the debugging options, a vty's password,
+routing daemon configurations, a log file name, and so forth. This
+information forms the initial command set for a routing beast as it is
+starting.
+
+Config files are generally found in:
+
+@itemize @asis
+@item @file{@value{INSTALL_PREFIX_ETC}/*.conf}
+@end itemize
+
+Each of the daemons has its own
+config file.  For example, zebra's default config file name is:
+
+@itemize @asis
+@item @file{@value{INSTALL_PREFIX_ETC}/zebra.conf}
+@end itemize
+
+The daemon name plus @file{.conf} is the default config file name. You
+can specify a config file using the @kbd{-f} or @kbd{--config-file}
+options when starting the daemon.
+
+
+
+@node Basic Config Commands, Sample Config File, Config Commands, Config Commands
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Basic Config Commands
+
+@deffn Command {hostname @var{hostname}} {}
+Set hostname of the router.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {password @var{password}} {}
+Set password for vty interface.  If there is no password, a vty won't
+accept connections.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {enable password @var{password}} {}
+Set enable password.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {log stdout} {}
+@deffnx Command {no log stdout} {}
+Set logging output to stdout.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {log file @var{filename}} {}
+If you want to log into a file please specify @code{filename} as
+follows.
+@example
+log file /usr/local/etc/bgpd.log
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {log syslog} {}
+@deffnx Command {no log syslog} {}
+Set logging output to syslog.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {write terminal} {}
+Displays the current configuration to the vty interface.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {write file} {}
+Write current configuration to configuration file.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {configure terminal} {}
+Change to configuration mode.  This command is the first step to
+configuration.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {terminal length @var{<0-512>}} {}
+Set terminal display length to @var{<0-512>}.  If length is 0, no
+display control is performed.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {who} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {list} {}
+List commands.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {service password-encryption} {}
+Encrypt password.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {service advanced-vty} {}
+Enable advanced mode VTY.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {service terminal-length @var{<0-512>}} {}
+Set system wide line configuration.  This configuration command applies
+to all VTY interfaces.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {show version} {}
+Show the current version of the Zebra and its build host information.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {line vty} {}
+Enter vty configuration mode.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {banner motd default} {}
+Set default motd string.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {no banner motd} {}
+No motd banner string will be printed.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Line Command} {exec-timeout @var{minute}} {}
+@deffnx {Line Command} {exec-timeout @var{minute} @var{second}} {}
+Set VTY connection timeout value.  When only one argument is specified
+it is used for timeout value in minutes.  Optional second argument is
+used for timeout value in seconds. Default timeout value is 10 minutes.
+When timeout value is zero, it means no timeout.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Line Command} {no exec-timeout} {}
+Do not perform timeout at all.  This command is as same as
+@command{exec-timeout 0 0}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Line Command} {access-class @var{access-list}} {}
+Restrict vty connections with an access list.
+@end deffn
+
+
+
+@node   Sample Config File,  , Basic Config Commands, Config Commands
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Sample Config File
+
+
+Below is a sample configuration file for the zebra daemon.
+
+@example
+@group
+!
+! Zebra configuration file
+!
+hostname Router
+password zebra
+enable password zebra
+!
+log stdout
+!
+!
+@end group
+@end example
+
+'!' and '#' are comment characters.  If the first character of the word
+is one of the comment characters then from the rest of the line forward
+will be ignored as a comment.
+
+@example
+password zebra!password
+@end example
+
+If a comment character is not the first character of the word, it's a
+normal character. So in the above example '!' will not be regarded as a
+comment and the password is set to 'zebra!password'.
+
+
+
+@node Common Invocation Options, Virtual Terminal Interfaces, Config Commands, Basic commands
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Common Invocation Options
+@c COMMON_OPTIONS
+@c OPTIONS section of the man page
+
+These options apply to all Zebra daemons.
+
+@table @samp
+
+@item -d
+@itemx --daemon
+Runs in daemon mode.
+
+@item -f @var{file}
+@itemx --config_file=@var{file}
+Set configuration file name.
+
+@item -h
+@itemx --help
+Display this help and exit.
+
+@item -i @var{file}
+@itemx --pid_file=@var{file}
+
+Upon startup the process identifier of the daemon is written to a file,
+typically in @file{/var/run}.  This file can be used by the init system
+to implement commands such as @command{@dots{}/init.d/zebra status},
+@command{@dots{}/init.d/zebra restart} or @command{@dots{}/init.d/zebra
+stop}.
+
+The file name is an run-time option rather than a configure-time option
+so that multiple routing daemons can be run simultaneously.  This is
+useful when using Zebra to implement a routing looking glass.  One
+machine can be used to collect differing routing views from differing
+points in the network.
+
+@item -P @var{port}
+@itemx --vty_port=@var{port}
+Set the VTY port number.
+
+@item -v
+@itemx --version
+Print program version.
+
+@end table
+
+
+
+@node  Virtual Terminal Interfaces,  , Common Invocation Options, Basic commands
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Virtual Terminal Interfaces
+
+VTY -- Virtual Terminal [aka TeletYpe] Interface is a command line
+interface (CLI) for user interaction with the routing daemon.
+
+@menu
+* VTY Overview::                Basics about VTYs                
+* VTY Modes::                   View, Enable, and Other VTY modes
+* VTY CLI Commands::            Commands for movement, edition, and management
+@end menu
+
+
+
+@node  VTY Overview, VTY Modes, Virtual Terminal Interfaces, Virtual Terminal Interfaces
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection VTY Overview
+
+
+VTY stands for Virtual TeletYpe interface.  It means you can connect to
+the daemon via the telnet protocol.
+
+To enable a VTY interface, you have to setup a VTY password.  If there
+is no VTY password, one cannot connect to the VTY interface at all.
+
+@example
+@group
+% telnet localhost 2601
+Trying 127.0.0.1...
+Connected to localhost.
+Escape character is '^]'.
+
+Hello, this is zebra (version @value{VERSION})
+Copyright 1997-2000 Kunihiro Ishiguro
+
+
+User Access Verification
+
+Password: XXXXX
+Router> ?
+  enable            Turn on privileged commands
+  exit              Exit current mode and down to previous mode
+  help              Description of the interactive help system
+  list              Print command list
+  show              Show running system information
+  who               Display who is on a vty
+Router> enable
+Password: XXXXX
+Router# configure terminal
+Router(config)# interface eth0
+Router(config-if)# ip address 10.0.0.1/8
+Router(config-if)# ^Z
+Router#
+@end group
+@end example
+
+'?' is very useful for looking up commands.
+
+
+
+@node  VTY Modes, VTY CLI Commands, VTY Overview, Virtual Terminal Interfaces
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection VTY Modes
+
+
+There are three basic VTY modes:
+
+@menu
+* VTY View Mode::               Mode for read-only interaction               
+* VTY Enable Mode::             Mode for read-write interaction
+* VTY Other Modes::             Special modes (tftp, etc)
+@end menu
+
+There are commands that may be restricted to specific VTY modes. 
+
+
+
+@node VTY View Mode, VTY Enable Mode, VTY Modes, VTY Modes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection VTY View Mode
+@c to be written (gpoul)
+
+
+This mode is for read-only access to the CLI. One may exit the mode by
+leaving the system, or by entering @code{enable} mode.
+
+
+
+@node VTY Enable Mode, VTY Other Modes, VTY View Mode, VTY Modes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection VTY Enable Mode
+
+
+@c to be written (gpoul)
+This mode is for read-write access to the CLI. One may exit the mode by
+leaving the system, or by escaping to view mode.
+
+
+
+@node VTY Other Modes,  , VTY Enable Mode, VTY Modes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection VTY Other Modes
+
+
+@c to be written (gpoul)
+This page is for describing other modes.
+
+@node VTY CLI Commands,  , VTY Modes, Virtual Terminal Interfaces
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection VTY CLI Commands
+
+
+Commands that you may use at the command-line are described in the following three subsubsections.
+
+@menu
+* CLI Movement Commands::       Commands for moving the cursor about
+* CLI Editing Commands::        Commands for changing text
+* CLI Advanced Commands::       Other commands, session management and so on
+@end menu
+
+
+
+@node CLI Movement Commands, CLI Editing Commands, VTY CLI Commands, VTY CLI Commands
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection CLI Movement Commands
+
+
+These commands are used for moving the CLI cursor. The @key{C} character
+means press the Control Key.
+
+@table @kbd
+
+@item C-f
+@itemx @key{RIGHT}
+@kindex C-f
+@kindex @key{RIGHT}
+Move forward one character.
+
+@item C-b
+@itemx @key{LEFT}
+@kindex C-b
+@kindex @key{LEFT}
+Move backward one character.
+
+@item M-f
+@kindex M-f
+Move forward one word.
+
+@item M-b
+@kindex M-b
+Move backward one word.
+
+@item C-a
+@kindex C-a
+Move to the beginning of the line.
+
+@item C-e
+@kindex C-e
+Move to the end of the line.
+
+@end table
+
+
+
+@node CLI Editing Commands, CLI Advanced Commands, CLI Movement Commands, VTY CLI Commands
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection CLI Editing Commands
+
+
+These commands are used for editing text on a line. The @key{C}
+character means press the Control Key.
+
+@table @kbd
+
+@item C-h
+@itemx @key{DEL}
+@kindex C-h
+@kindex @key{DEL}
+Delete the character before point.
+
+@item C-d
+@kindex C-d
+Delete the character after point.
+
+@item M-d
+@kindex M-d
+Forward kill word.
+
+@item C-w
+@kindex C-w
+Backward kill word.
+
+@item C-k
+@kindex C-k
+Kill to the end of the line.
+
+@item C-u
+@kindex C-u
+Kill line from the beginning, erasing input.
+
+@item C-t
+@kindex C-t
+Transpose character.
+
+@end table
+
+
+
+@node CLI Advanced Commands,  , CLI Editing Commands, VTY CLI Commands
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection CLI Advanced Commands
+
+
+There are several additional CLI commands for command line completions,
+insta-help, and VTY session management.
+
+@table @kbd
+
+@item C-c
+@kindex C-c
+Interrupt current input and moves to the next line.
+
+@item C-z
+@kindex C-z
+End current configuration session and move to top node.
+
+
+@item C-n
+@itemx @key{DOWN}
+@kindex C-n
+@kindex @key{DOWN}
+Move down to next line in the history buffer.
+
+@item C-p
+@itemx @key{UP}
+@kindex C-p
+@kindex @key{UP}
+Move up to previous line in the history buffer.
+
+@item TAB
+@kindex @key{TAB}
+Use command line completion by typing @key{TAB}.
+
+@item
+@kindex ?
+You can use command line help by typing @code{help} at the beginning of
+the line.  Typing @kbd{?} at any point in the line will show possible
+completions.
+
+@end table
diff --git a/doc/bgpd.8 b/doc/bgpd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cba3bda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/bgpd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+.TH BGPD 8 "July 2000" "Zebra Beast - BGPD" "Version 0.88"
+
+.SH NAME
+bgpd \- a BGPv4, BGPv4+, BGPv4- routing engine for use with Zebra
+
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B bgpd
+[
+.B \-dhpPv
+]
+[
+.B \-f config-file
+]
+[
+.B \-i pid-file
+]
+[
+.B \-p bgp-port-number
+]
+[
+.B \--bgp_port=port-number
+]
+[
+.B \-P vty-port-number
+]
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B bgpd 
+is a routing component that works with the 
+.B zebra
+routing engine.
+
+
+.SH OPTIONS
+
+.TP
+\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-daemon\fR
+Runs in daemon mode, forking and exiting from tty.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-config-file \fR\fIconfig-file\fR 
+Specifies the config file to use for startup. If not specified this
+option will likely default to \fB\fI/usr/local/etc/bgpd.conf\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
+A brief message.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-pid_file \fR\fIpid-file\fR
+When bgpd starts its process idenifier is written to
+\fB\fIpid-file\fR.  The init system uses the recorded PID to stop or
+restart bgpd.  The likely default is \fB\fI/var/run/bgpd.pid\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-bgp_port=\fR\fIport\fR
+Set the port that bgpd will listen to for bgp data.  
+
+.TP
+\fB\-P\fR, \fB\-\-vty_port \fR\fIport-number\fR 
+Specify the port that the bgpd VTY will listen on. This defaults to
+2605, as specified in \fI/etc/services\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-retain\fR 
+When the program terminates, retain routes added by \fBbgpd\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR
+Print the version and exit.
+
+
+.SH COMMANDS
+
+\fB router zebra \fR -- (Move routes into kernel table)
+\fB router bgp [AS-NUMBER] \fR
+
+\fB bgp router-id [BGP-ROUTER-ID] \fR
+
+\fB network [NETWORK] area [BGP-AREA-ID] \fR
+\fB no network [NETWORK] \fR
+
+\fB aggregate-address [NETWORK] \fR
+
+\fB neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] remote-as [REMOTE-AS] \fR
+\fB neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] version [ 4 | 4+ | 4- ] \fR
+
+\fB neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] description \fR
+\fB no neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] description \fR
+
+\fB neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] route-map [in | out] \fR
+\fB neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] distribute-list [in | out] \fR
+\fB neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] next-hop-self \fR
+\fB neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] weight [WEIGHT] \fR
+\fB neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] default-originate \fR
+\fB neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] ebgp-multihop \fR
+
+\fB neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] shutdown \fR
+\fB no neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] shutdown \fR
+
+\fB clear ip bgp [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] \fR
+
+\fB show ip bgp [NETWORK] \fR
+\fB show ip bgp reg-exp [AS-REGEXP] \fR
+\fB show ip bgp summary \fR
+\fB show ip bgp neighbor [PEER-IP-ADDRESS] \fR
+\fB show ip bgp route \fR
+
+\fB show debug \fR
+
+\fB debug bgp \fR
+\fB debug event \fR
+\fB debug update \fR
+\fB debug keepalive \fR
+
+\fB no debug event \fR
+\fB no debug update \fR
+\fB no debug keepalive \fR
+
+
+.SH FILES
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/sbin/bgpd
+The default location of the 
+.B bgpd
+binary.
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/etc/bgpd.conf
+The default location of the 
+.B bgpd
+config file.
+
+.TP
+.BI $(PWD)/bgpd.log 
+If the 
+.B bgpd
+process is config'd to output logs to a file, then you will find this
+file in the directory where you started \fBbgpd\fR.
+
+
+.SH WARNING
+This man page is intended as a quick reference for command line
+options, and for config file commands. The definitive document is the
+Info file \fBzebra\fR.
+
+
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+The bgpd process may log to standard output, to a VTY, to a log
+file, or through syslog to the system logs. \fBbgpd\fR supports many
+debugging options, see the Info file, or the source for details.
+
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+References to other related man pages:
+
+ripd(8), ripngd(8), ospfd(8), ospf6d(8), zebra(8), vtysh(1)
+
+
+.SH BUGS
+.B bgpd
+eats bugs for breakfast. If you have food for the maintainers try 
+.BI <bug-zebra@gnu.org>
+
+
+.SH AUTHOR[S]
+See <\fBwww.zebra.org\fR>, or the Info file for an accurate list of authors.
+
diff --git a/doc/bgpd.texi b/doc/bgpd.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c10fba9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/bgpd.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,1288 @@
+@c -*-texinfo-*-
+@c This is part of the GNU Zebra Manual.
+@c Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 2002 Kunihiro Ishiguro <kunihiro@zebra.org>
+@c See file zebra.texi for copying conditions.
+@node BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter BGP
+
+  BGP stands for a Border Gateway Protocol.  The lastest BGP version
+is 4.  It is referred as BGP-4.  BGP-4 is one of the Exterior Gateway
+Protocols and de-fact standard of Inter Domain routing protocol.
+BGP-4 is described in @code{RFC1771} - @cite{A Border Gateway Protocol
+4 (BGP-4)}.
+
+  Many extentions are added to @code{RFC1771}.  @code{RFC2858} -
+@cite{Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4} provide multiprotocol
+support to BGP-4.
+
+@menu
+* Starting BGP::                
+* BGP router::                  
+* BGP network::                 
+* BGP Peer::                    
+* BGP Peer Group::              
+* BGP Address Family::          
+* Autonomous System::           
+* BGP Communities Attribute::   
+* BGP Extended Communities Attribute::  
+* Displaying BGP routes::       
+* Capability Negotiation::      
+* Route Reflector::             
+* Route Server::                
+* How to set up a 6-Bone connection::  
+* Dump BGP packets and table::  
+@end menu
+
+@node Starting BGP, BGP router, BGP, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Starting BGP
+
+Default configuration file of @command{bgpd} is @file{bgpd.conf}.
+@command{bgpd} searches the current directory first then
+@value{INSTALL_PREFIX_ETC}/bgpd.conf.  All of bgpd's command must be
+configured in @file{bgpd.conf}.
+
+@command{bgpd} specific invocation options are described below.  Common
+options may also be specified (@pxref{Common Invocation Options}).
+
+@table @samp
+@item -p @var{PORT}
+@itemx --bgp_port=@var{PORT}
+Set the bgp protocol's port number.
+
+@item -r
+@itemx --retain
+When program terminates, retain BGP routes added by zebra.
+@end table
+
+@node BGP router, BGP network, Starting BGP, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section BGP router
+
+  First of all you must configure BGP router with @command{router bgp}
+command.  To configure BGP router, you need AS number.  AS number is an
+identification of autonomous system.  BGP protocol uses the AS number
+for detecting whether the BGP connection is internal one or external one.
+
+@deffn Command {router bgp @var{asn}} {}
+Enable a BGP protocol process with the specified @var{asn}.  After
+this statement you can input any @code{BGP Commands}.  You can not
+create different BGP process under different @var{asn} without
+specifying @code{multiple-instance} (@pxref{Multiple instance}).
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {no router bgp @var{asn}} {}
+Destroy a BGP protocol process with the specified @var{asn}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {bgp router-id @var{A.B.C.D}} {}
+This command specifies the router-ID.  If @command{bgpd} connects to @command{zebra} it gets
+interface and address information.  In that case default router ID value
+is selected as the largest IP Address of the interfaces.  When
+@code{router zebra} is not enabled @command{bgpd} can't get interface information
+so @code{router-id} is set to 0.0.0.0.  So please set router-id by hand.
+@end deffn
+
+@menu
+* BGP distance::                
+* BGP decision process::        
+@end menu
+
+@node BGP distance, BGP decision process, BGP router, BGP router
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection BGP distance
+
+@deffn {BGP} {distance bgp <1-255> <1-255> <1-255>} {}
+This command change distance value of BGP.  Each argument is distance
+value for external routes, internal routes and local routes.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {distance <1-255> @var{A.B.C.D/M}} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {distance <1-255> @var{A.B.C.D/M} @var{word}} {}
+This command set distance value to 
+@end deffn
+
+@node BGP decision process,  , BGP distance, BGP router
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection BGP decision process
+
+@table @asis
+@item 1. Weight check
+  
+@item 2. Local preference check.
+
+@item 3. Local route check.
+
+@item 4. AS path length check.
+
+@item 5. Origin check.
+
+@item 6. MED check.
+@end table
+
+@node BGP network, BGP Peer, BGP router, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section BGP network
+
+@menu
+* BGP route::                   
+* Route Aggregation::           
+* Redistribute to BGP::         
+@end menu
+
+@node BGP route, Route Aggregation, BGP network, BGP network
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection BGP route
+
+@deffn {BGP} {network @var{A.B.C.D/M}} {}
+This command adds the announcement network.
+@example
+@group
+router bgp 1
+ network 10.0.0.0/8
+@end group
+@end example
+This configuration example says that network 10.0.0.0/8 will be
+announced to all neighbors.  Some vendors' routers don't advertise
+routes if they aren't present in their IGP routing tables; @code{bgp}
+doesn't care about IGP routes when announcing its routes.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {no network @var{A.B.C.D/M}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Route Aggregation, Redistribute to BGP, BGP route, BGP network
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Route Aggregation
+
+@deffn {BGP} {aggregate-address @var{A.B.C.D/M}} {}
+This command specifies an aggregate address.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {aggregate-address @var{A.B.C.D/M} as-set} {}
+This command specifies an aggregate address.  Resulting routes inlucde
+AS set.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {aggregate-address @var{A.B.C.D/M} summary-only} {}
+This command specifies an aggregate address.  Aggreated routes will
+not be announce.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {no aggregate-address @var{A.B.C.D/M}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Redistribute to BGP,  , Route Aggregation, BGP network
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Redistribute to BGP
+
+@deffn {BGP} {redistribute kernel} {}
+Redistribute kernel route to BGP process.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {redistribute static} {}
+Redistribute static route to BGP process.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {redistribute connected} {}
+Redistribute connected route to BGP process.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {redistribute rip} {}
+Redistribute RIP route to BGP process.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {redistribute ospf} {}
+Redistribute OSPF route to BGP process.
+@end deffn
+
+@node BGP Peer, BGP Peer Group, BGP network, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section BGP Peer
+
+@menu
+* Defining Peer::               
+* BGP Peer commands::           
+* Peer filtering::              
+@end menu
+
+@node Defining Peer, BGP Peer commands, BGP Peer, BGP Peer
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Defining Peer
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} remote-as @var{asn}} {}
+Creates a new neighbor whose remote-as is @var{asn}.  @var{peer}
+can be an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address.
+@example
+@group
+router bgp 1
+ neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 2
+@end group
+@end example
+In this case my router, in AS-1, is trying to peer with AS-2 at
+10.0.0.1.
+
+This command must be the first command used when configuring a neighbor.
+If the remote-as is not specified, @command{bgpd} will complain like this:
+@example
+can't find neighbor 10.0.0.1
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@node BGP Peer commands, Peer filtering, Defining Peer, BGP Peer
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection BGP Peer commands
+
+In a @code{router bgp} clause there are neighbor specific configurations
+required.
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} shutdown} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} shutdown} {}
+Shutdown the peer.  We can delete the neighbor's configuration by
+@code{no neighbor @var{peer} remote-as @var{as-number}} but all
+configuration of the neighbor will be deleted.  When you want to
+preserve the configuration, but want to drop the BGP peer, use this
+syntax.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} ebgp-multihop} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} ebgp-multihop} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} description ...} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} description ...} {}
+Set description of the peer.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} version @var{version}} {}
+Set up the neighbor's BGP version.  @var{version} can be @var{4},
+@var{4+} or @var{4-}.  BGP version @var{4} is the default value used for
+BGP peering.  BGP version @var{4+} means that the neighbor supports
+Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4.  BGP version @var{4-} is similar but
+the neighbor speaks the old Internet-Draft revision 00's Multiprotocol
+Extensions for BGP-4.  Some routing software is still using this
+version.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} interface @var{ifname}} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} interface @var{ifname}} {}
+When you connect to a BGP peer over an IPv6 link-local address, you have
+to specify the @var{ifname} of the interface used for the connection.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} next-hop-self} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} next-hop-self} {}
+This command specifies an announced route's nexthop as being equivalent
+to the address of the bgp router.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} update-source} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} update-source} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} default-originate} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} default-originate} {}
+@command{bgpd}'s default is to not announce the default route (0.0.0.0/0) even it
+is in routing table.  When you want to announce default routes to the
+peer, use this command.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} port @var{port}} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} port @var{port}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} send-community} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} send-community} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} weight @var{weight}} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} weight @var{weight}} {}
+This command specifies a default @var{weight} value for the neighbor's
+routes.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} maximum-prefix @var{number}} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} maximum-prefix @var{number}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Peer filtering,  , BGP Peer commands, BGP Peer
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Peer filtering
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} distribute-list @var{name} [in|out]} {}
+This command specifies a distribute-list for the peer.  @var{direct} is
+@samp{in} or @samp{out}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP command} {neighbor @var{peer} prefix-list @var{name} [in|out]} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP command} {neighbor @var{peer} filter-list @var{name} [in|out]} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} route-map @var{name} [in|out]} {}
+Apply a route-map on the neighbor.  @var{direct} must be @code{in} or
+@code{out}.
+@end deffn
+
+@c -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node BGP Peer Group, BGP Address Family, BGP Peer, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section BGP Peer Group
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{word} peer-group} {}
+This command defines a new peer group.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} peer-group @var{word}} {}
+This command bind specific peer to peer group @var{word}.
+@end deffn
+
+@node BGP Address Family, Autonomous System, BGP Peer Group, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section BGP Address Family
+
+
+
+@page
+@c -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Autonomous System, BGP Communities Attribute, BGP Address Family, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Autonomous System
+
+  AS (Autonomous System) is one of the essential element of BGP.  BGP
+is a distance vector routing protocol.  AS framework provides distance
+vector metric and loop detection to BGP.  @code{RFC1930} -
+@cite{Guidelines for creation, selection, and registration of an
+Autonomous System (AS)} describes how to use AS.
+
+  AS number is tow octet digita value.  So the value range is from 1
+to 65535.  AS numbers 64512 through 65535 are defined as private AS
+numbers.  Private AS numbers must not to be advertised in the global
+Internet.
+
+@menu
+* AS Path Regular Expression::  
+* Display BGP Routes by AS Path::  
+* AS Path Access List::         
+* Using AS Path in Route Map::  
+* Private AS Numbers::          
+@end menu
+
+@node AS Path Regular Expression, Display BGP Routes by AS Path, Autonomous System, Autonomous System
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection AS Path Regular Expression
+
+  AS path regular expression can be used for displaying BGP routes and
+AS path access list.  AS path regular expression is based on
+@code{POSIX 1003.2} regular expressions.  Following description is
+just a subset of @code{POSIX} regular expression.  User can use full
+@code{POSIX} regular expression.  Adding to that special character '_'
+is added for AS path regular expression.
+
+@table @code
+@item .
+Matches any single character.
+@item *
+Matches 0 or more occurrences of pattern.
+@item +
+Matches 1 or more occurrences of pattern.
+@item ?
+Match 0 or 1 occurrences of pattern.
+@item ^
+Matches the beginning of the line.
+@item $
+Matches the end of the line.
+@item _
+Character @code{_} has special meanings in AS path regular expression.
+It matches to space and comma , and AS set delimiter @{ and @} and AS
+confederation delimiter @code{(} and @code{)}.  And it also matches to
+the beginning of the line and the end of the line.  So @code{_} can be
+used for AS value boundaries match.  @code{show ip bgp regexp _7675_}
+matches to all of BGP routes which as AS number include @var{7675}.
+@end table
+
+@node Display BGP Routes by AS Path, AS Path Access List, AS Path Regular Expression, Autonomous System
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Display BGP Routes by AS Path
+
+  To show BGP routes which has specific AS path information @code{show
+ip bgp} command can be used.  
+
+@deffn Command {show ip bgp regexp @var{line}} {}
+This commands display BGP routes that matches AS path regular
+expression @var{line}.
+@end deffn
+
+@node AS Path Access List, Using AS Path in Route Map, Display BGP Routes by AS Path, Autonomous System
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection AS Path Access List
+
+  AS path access list is user defined AS path.
+
+@deffn {Command} {ip as-path access-list @var{word} @{permit|deny@} @var{line}} {}
+This command defines a new AS path access list.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {no ip as-path access-list @var{word}} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no ip as-path access-list @var{word} @{permit|deny@} @var{line}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Using AS Path in Route Map, Private AS Numbers, AS Path Access List, Autonomous System
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Using AS Path in Route Map
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {match as-path @var{word}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {set as-path prepend @var{as-path}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Private AS Numbers,  , Using AS Path in Route Map, Autonomous System
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Private AS Numbers
+
+@page
+@c -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node BGP Communities Attribute, BGP Extended Communities Attribute, Autonomous System, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section BGP Communities Attribute
+
+  BGP communities attribute is widely used for implementing policy
+routing.  Network operators can manipulate BGP communities attribute
+based on their network policy.  BGP communities attribute is defined
+in @code{RFC1997} - @cite{BGP Communities Attribute} and
+@code{RFC1998} - @cite{An Application of the BGP Community Attribute
+in Multi-home Routing}.  It is an optional transitive attribute,
+therefore local policy can travel through different autonomous system.
+
+  Communities attribute is a set of communities values.  Each
+communities value is 4 octet long.  The following format is used to
+define communities value.
+
+@table @code
+@item AS:VAL
+This format represents 4 octet communities value.  @code{AS} is high
+order 2 octet in digit format.  @code{VAL} is low order 2 octet in
+digit format.  This format is useful to define AS oriented policy
+value.  For example, @code{7675:80} can be used when AS 7675 wants to
+pass local policy value 80 to neighboring peer.
+@item internet
+@code{internet} represents well-known communities value 0.
+@item no-export
+@code{no-export} represents well-known communities value @code{NO_EXPORT}@*
+@r{(0xFFFFFF01)}.  All routes carry this value must not be advertised
+to outside a BGP confederation boundary.  If neighboring BGP peer is
+part of BGP confederation, the peer is considered as inside a BGP
+confederation boundary, so the route will be announced to the peer.
+@item no-advertise
+@code{no-advertise} represents well-known communities value
+@code{NO_ADVERTISE}@*@r{(0xFFFFFF02)}.  All routes carry this value
+must not be advertise to other BGP peers.
+@item local-AS
+@code{local-AS} represents well-known communities value
+@code{NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED} @r{(0xFFFFFF03)}.  All routes carry this
+value must not be advertised to external BGP peers.  Even if the
+neighboring router is part of confederation, it is considered as
+external BGP peer, so the route will not be announced to the peer.
+@end table
+
+  When BGP communities attribute is received, duplicated communities
+value in the communities attribute is ignored and each communities
+values are sorted in numerical order.
+  
+@menu
+* BGP Community Lists::         
+* Numbered BGP Community Lists::  
+* BGP Community in Route Map::  
+* Display BGP Routes by Community::  
+* Using BGP Communities Attribute::  
+@end menu
+
+@node BGP Community Lists, Numbered BGP Community Lists, BGP Communities Attribute, BGP Communities Attribute
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection BGP Community Lists
+
+  BGP community list is a user defined BGP communites attribute list.
+BGP community list can be used for matching or manipulating BGP
+communities attribute in updates.
+
+  There are two types of community list.  One is standard community
+list and another is expanded community list.  Standard community list
+defines communities attribute.  Expanded community list defines
+communities attribute string with regular expression.  Standard
+community list is compiled into binary format when user define it.
+Standard community list will be directly compared to BGP communities
+attribute in BGP updates.  Therefore the comparison is faster than
+expanded community list.
+
+@deffn Command {ip community-list standard @var{name} @{permit|deny@} @var{community}} {}
+This command defines a new standard community list.  @var{community}
+is communities value.  The @var{community} is compiled into community
+structure.  We can define multiple community list under same name.  In
+that case match will happen user defined order.  Once the
+community list matches to communities attribute in BGP updates it
+return permit or deny by the community list definition.  When there is
+no matched entry, deny will be returned.  When @var{community} is
+empty it matches to any routes.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {ip community-list expanded @var{name} @{permit|deny@} @var{line}} {}
+This command defines a new expanded community list.  @var{line} is a
+string expression of communities attribute.  @var{line} can include
+regular expression to match communities attribute in BGP updates.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {no ip community-list @var{name}} {}
+@deffnx Command {no ip community-list standard @var{name}} {}
+@deffnx Command {no ip community-list expanded @var{name}} {}
+These commands delete community lists specified by @var{name}.  All of
+community lists shares a single name space.  So community lists can be
+removed simpley specifying community lists name.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip community-list} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip community-list @var{name}} {}
+This command display current community list information.  When
+@var{name} is specified the specified community list's information is
+shown.
+
+@example
+# show ip community-list 
+Named Community standard list CLIST
+    permit 7675:80 7675:100 no-export
+    deny internet
+Named Community expanded list EXPAND
+    permit :
+
+# show ip community-list CLIST
+Named Community standard list CLIST
+    permit 7675:80 7675:100 no-export
+    deny internet
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@node Numbered BGP Community Lists, BGP Community in Route Map, BGP Community Lists, BGP Communities Attribute
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Numbered BGP Community Lists
+
+  When number is used for BGP community list name, the number has
+special meanings.  Community list number in the range from 1 and 99 is
+standard community list.  Community list number in the range from 100
+to 199 is expanded community list.  These community lists are called
+as numbered community lists.  On the other hand normal community lists
+is called as named community lists.
+
+@deffn Command {ip community-list <1-99> @{permit|deny@} @var{community}} {}
+This command defines a new community list.  <1-99> is standard
+community list number.  Community list name within this range defines
+standard community list.  When @var{community} is empty it matches to
+any routes.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {ip community-list <100-199> @{permit|deny@} @var{community}} {}
+This command defines a new community list.  <100-199> is expanded
+community list number.  Community list name within this range defines
+expanded community list.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {ip community-list @var{name} @{permit|deny@} @var{community}} {}
+When community list type is not specifed, the community list type is
+automatically detected.  If @var{community} can be compiled into
+communities attribute, the community list is defined as a standard
+community list.  Otherwise it is defined as an expanded community
+list.  This feature is left for backward compability.  Use of this
+feature is not recommended.
+@end deffn
+
+@node BGP Community in Route Map, Display BGP Routes by Community, Numbered BGP Community Lists, BGP Communities Attribute
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection BGP Community in Route Map
+
+  In Route Map (@pxref{Route Map}), we can match or set BGP
+communities attribute.  Using this feature network operator can
+implement their network policy based on BGP communities attribute.
+
+  Following commands can be used in Route Map.
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {match community @var{word}} {}
+@deffnx {Route Map} {match community @var{word} exact-match} {}
+This command perform match to BGP updates using community list
+@var{word}.  When the one of BGP communities value match to the one of
+communities value in community list, it is match.  When
+@code{exact-match} keyword is spcified, match happen only when BGP
+updates have completely same communities value specified in the
+community list.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {set community none} {}
+@deffnx {Route Map} {set community @var{community}} {}
+@deffnx {Route Map} {set community @var{community} additive} {}
+This command manipulate communities value in BGP updates.  When
+@code{none} is specified as communities value, it removes entire
+communities attribute from BGP updates.  When @var{community} is not
+@code{none}, specified communities value is set to BGP updates.  If
+BGP updates already has BGP communities value, the existing BGP
+communities value is replaced with specified @var{community} value.
+When @code{additive} keyword is specified, @var{community} is appended
+to the existing communities value.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {set comm-list @var{word} delete} {}
+This command remove communities value from BGP communities attribute.
+The @var{word} is community list name.  When BGP route's communities
+value matches to the community list @var{word}, the communities value
+is removed.  When all of communities value is removed eventually, the
+BGP update's communities attribute is completely removed.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Display BGP Routes by Community, Using BGP Communities Attribute, BGP Community in Route Map, BGP Communities Attribute
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Display BGP Routes by Community
+
+  To show BGP routes which has specific BGP communities attribute,
+@code{show ip bgp} command can be used.  The @var{community} value and
+community list can be used for @code{show ip bgp} command.
+
+@deffn Command {show ip bgp community} {}
+@deffnx Command {show ip bgp community @var{community}} {}
+@deffnx Command {show ip bgp community @var{community} exact-match} {}
+@code{show ip bgp community} displays BGP routes which has communities
+attribute.  When @var{community} is specified, BGP routes that matches
+@var{community} value is displayed.  For this command, @code{internet}
+keyword can't be used for @var{community} value.  When
+@code{exact-match} is specified, it display only routes that have an
+exact match.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {show ip bgp community-list @var{word}} {}
+@deffnx Command {show ip bgp community-list @var{word} exact-match} {}
+This commands display BGP routes that matches community list
+@var{word}.  When @code{exact-match} is specified, display only routes
+that have an exact match.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Using BGP Communities Attribute,  , Display BGP Routes by Community, BGP Communities Attribute
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Using BGP Communities Attribute
+
+  Following configuration is the most typical usage of BGP communities
+attribute.  AS 7675 provides upstream Internet connection to AS 100.
+When following configuration exists in AS 7675, AS 100 networks
+operator can set local preference in AS 7675 network by setting BGP
+communities attribute to the updates.
+
+@example
+router bgp 7675
+ neighbor 192.168.0.1 remote-as 100
+ neighbor 192.168.0.1 route-map RMAP in
+!
+ip community-list 70 permit 7675:70
+ip community-list 70 deny
+ip community-list 80 permit 7675:80
+ip community-list 80 deny
+ip community-list 90 permit 7675:90
+ip community-list 90 deny
+!
+route-map RMAP permit 10
+ match community 70
+ set local-preference 70
+!
+route-map RMAP permit 20
+ match community 80
+ set local-preference 80
+!
+route-map RMAP permit 30
+ match community 90
+ set local-preference 90
+@end example
+
+  Following configuration announce 10.0.0.0/8 from AS 100 to AS 7675.
+The route has communities value 7675:80 so when above configuration
+exists in AS 7675, announced route's local preference will be set to
+value 80.
+
+@example
+router bgp 100
+ network 10.0.0.0/8
+ neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 7675
+ neighbor 192.168.0.2 route-map RMAP out
+!
+ip prefix-list PLIST permit 10.0.0.0/8
+!
+route-map RMAP permit 10
+ match ip address prefix-list PLIST
+ set community 7675:80
+@end example
+
+  Following configuration is an example of BGP route filtering using
+communities attribute.  This configuration only permit BGP routes
+which has BGP communities value 0:80 or 0:90.  Network operator can
+put special internal communities value at BGP border router, then
+limit the BGP routes announcement into the internal network.
+
+@example
+router bgp 7675
+ neighbor 192.168.0.1 remote-as 100
+ neighbor 192.168.0.1 route-map RMAP in
+!
+ip community-list 1 permit 0:80 0:90
+!
+route-map RMAP permit in
+ match community 1
+@end example
+
+  Following exmaple filter BGP routes which has communities value 1:1.
+When there is no match community-list returns deny.  To avoid
+filtering all of routes, we need to define permit any at last.
+
+@example
+router bgp 7675
+ neighbor 192.168.0.1 remote-as 100
+ neighbor 192.168.0.1 route-map RMAP in
+!
+ip community-list standard FILTER deny 1:1
+ip community-list standard FILTER permit
+!
+route-map RMAP permit 10
+ match community FILTER
+@end example
+
+  Communities value keyword @code{internet} has special meanings in
+standard community lists.  In below example @code{internet} act as
+match any.  It matches all of BGP routes even if the route does not
+have communities attribute at all.  So community list @code{INTERNET}
+is same as above example's @code{FILTER}.
+
+@example
+ip community-list standard INTERNET deny 1:1
+ip community-list standard INTERNET permit internet
+@end example
+
+  Following configuration is an example of communities value deletion.
+With this configuration communities value 100:1 and 100:2 is removed
+from BGP updates.  For communities value deletion, only @code{permit}
+community-list is used.  @code{deny} community-list is ignored.
+
+@example
+router bgp 7675
+ neighbor 192.168.0.1 remote-as 100
+ neighbor 192.168.0.1 route-map RMAP in
+!
+ip community-list standard DEL permit 100:1 100:2
+!
+route-map RMAP permit 10
+ set comm-list DEL delete
+@end example
+
+@c -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node BGP Extended Communities Attribute, Displaying BGP routes, BGP Communities Attribute, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section BGP Extended Communities Attribute
+
+  BGP extended communities attribute is introduced with MPLS VPN/BGP
+technology.  MPLS VPN/BGP expands capability of network infrastructure
+to provide VPN functionality.  At the same time it requires a new
+framework for policy routing.  With BGP Extended Communities Attribute
+we can use Route Target or Site of Origin for implementing network
+policy for MPLS VPN/BGP.
+
+  BGP Extended Communities Attribute is similar to BGP Communities
+Attribute.  It is an optional transitive attribute.  BGP Extended
+Communities Attribute can carry multiple Extended Community value.
+Each Extended Community value is eight octet length.
+
+  BGP Extended Communities Attribute provides an extended range
+compared with BGP Communities Attribute.  Adding to that there is a
+type field in each value to provides community space structure.
+
+  There are two format to define Extended Community value.  One is AS
+based format the other is IP address based format.
+
+@table @code
+@item AS:VAL
+This is a format to define AS based Extended Community value.
+@code{AS} part is 2 octets Global Administrator subfield in Extended
+Community value.  @code{VAL} part is 4 octets Local Administrator
+subfield.  @code{7675:100} represents AS 7675 policy value 100.
+@item IP-Address:VAL
+This is a format to define IP address based Extended Community value.
+@code{IP-Address} part is 4 octets Global Administrator subfield.
+@code{VAL} part is 2 octets Local Administrator subfield.
+@code{10.0.0.1:100} represents 
+@end table
+
+@menu
+* BGP Extended Community Lists::  
+* BGP Extended Communities in Route Map::  
+@end menu
+
+@node BGP Extended Community Lists, BGP Extended Communities in Route Map, BGP Extended Communities Attribute, BGP Extended Communities Attribute
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection BGP Extended Community Lists
+
+  Expanded Community Lists is a user defined BGP Expanded Community
+Lists.
+
+@deffn Command {ip extcommunity-list standard @var{name} @{permit|deny@} @var{extcommunity}} {}
+This command defines a new standard extcommunity-list.
+@var{extcommunity} is extended communities value.  The
+@var{extcommunity} is compiled into extended community structure.  We
+can define multiple extcommunity-list under same name.  In that case
+match will happen user defined order.  Once the extcommunity-list
+matches to extended communities attribute in BGP updates it return
+permit or deny based upon the extcommunity-list definition.  When
+there is no matched entry, deny will be returned.  When
+@var{extcommunity} is empty it matches to any routes.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {ip extcommunity-list expanded @var{name} @{permit|deny@} @var{line}} {}
+This command defines a new expanded extcommunity-list.  @var{line} is
+a string expression of extended communities attribute.  @var{line} can
+include regular expression to match extended communities attribute in
+BGP updates.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {no ip extcommunity-list @var{name}} {}
+@deffnx Command {no ip extcommunity-list standard @var{name}} {}
+@deffnx Command {no ip extcommunity-list expanded @var{name}} {}
+These commands delete extended community lists specified by
+@var{name}.  All of extended community lists shares a single name
+space.  So extended community lists can be removed simpley specifying
+the name.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip extcommunity-list} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip extcommunity-list @var{name}} {}
+This command display current extcommunity-list information.  When
+@var{name} is specified the community list's information is shown.
+
+@example
+# show ip extcommunity-list 
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@node BGP Extended Communities in Route Map,  , BGP Extended Community Lists, BGP Extended Communities Attribute
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection BGP Extended Communities in Route Map
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {match extcommunity @var{word}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {set extcommunity rt @var{extcommunity}} {}
+This command set Route Target value.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {set extcommunity soo @var{extcommunity}} {}
+This command set Site of Origin value.
+@end deffn
+
+@c -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Displaying BGP routes, Capability Negotiation, BGP Extended Communities Attribute, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Displaying BGP Routes
+
+@menu
+* Show IP BGP::                 
+* More Show IP BGP::            
+@end menu
+
+@node Show IP BGP, More Show IP BGP, Displaying BGP routes, Displaying BGP routes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Show IP BGP
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip bgp} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip bgp @var{A.B.C.D}} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip bgp @var{X:X::X:X}} {}
+This command displays BGP routes.  When no route is specified it
+display all of IPv4 BGP routes.
+@end deffn
+
+@example
+BGP table version is 0, local router ID is 10.1.1.1
+Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best, i - internal
+Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete
+
+   Network          Next Hop            Metric LocPrf Weight Path
+*> 1.1.1.1/32       0.0.0.0                  0         32768 i
+
+Total number of prefixes 1
+@end example
+
+@node More Show IP BGP,  , Show IP BGP, Displaying BGP routes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection More Show IP BGP
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip bgp regexp @var{line}} {}
+This command display BGP routes using AS path regular expression (@pxref{Display BGP Routes by AS Path}).
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {show ip bgp community @var{community}} {}
+@deffnx Command {show ip bgp community @var{community} exact-match} {}
+This command display BGP routes using @var{community} (@pxref{Display
+BGP Routes by Community}).
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {show ip bgp community-list @var{word}} {}
+@deffnx Command {show ip bgp community-list @var{word} exact-match} {}
+This command display BGP routes using community list (@pxref{Display
+BGP Routes by Community}).
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip bgp summary} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip bgp neighbor [@var{peer}]} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {clear ip bgp @var{peer}} {}
+Clear peers which have addresses of X.X.X.X
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {clear ip bgp @var{peer} soft in} {}
+Clear peer using soft reconfiguration.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show debug} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {debug event} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {debug update} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {debug keepalive} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {no debug event} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {no debug update} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {no debug keepalive} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Capability Negotiation, Route Reflector, Displaying BGP routes, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Capability Negotiation
+
+  When adding IPv6 routing information exchange feature to BGP.  There
+were some proposals.  @acronym{IETF} @acronym{IDR} working group finally
+take a proposal called Multiprotocol Extension for BGP.  The
+specification is described in RFC2283.  The protocol does not define new
+protocols.  It defines new attributes to existing BGP.  When it is used
+exchanging IPv6 routing information it is called BGP-4+.  When it is
+used for exchanging multicast routing information it is called MBGP.
+
+  @command{bgpd} supports Multiprotocol Extension for BGP.  So if remote peer
+supports the protocol, @command{bgpd} can exchange IPv6 and/or multicast routing
+information.
+
+  Traditional BGP does not have the feature to detect remote peer's
+capability whether it can handle other than IPv4 unicast routes.  This
+is a big problem using Multiprotocol Extension for BGP to operational
+network.  @cite{draft-ietf-idr-bgp4-cap-neg-04.txt} is proposing a
+feature called Capability Negotiation.  @command{bgpd} use this Capability
+Negotiation to detect remote peer's capabilities.  If the peer is only
+configured as IPv4 unicast neighbor, @command{bgpd} does not send these Capability
+Negotiation packets.
+
+  By default, Zebra will bring up peering with minimal common capability
+for the both sides.  For example, local router has unicast and multicast 
+capabilitie and remote router has unicast capability.  In this case,
+the local router will establish the connection with unicast only capability.
+When there are no common capabilities, Zebra sends Unsupported Capability
+error and then resets the connection.
+
+  If you want to completely match capabilities with remote peer.  Please
+use @command{strict-capability-match} command.
+  
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} strict-capability-match} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} strict-capability-match} {}
+Strictly compares remote capabilities and local capabilities.  If capabilities
+are different, send Unsupported Capability error then reset connection.
+@end deffn
+
+  You may want to disable sending Capability Negotiation OPEN message
+optional parameter to the peer when remote peer does not implement
+Capability Negotiation.  Please use @command{dont-capability-negotiate}
+command to disable the feature.
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} dont-capability-negotiate} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} dont-capability-negotiate} {}
+Suppress sending Capability Negotiation as OPEN message optional
+parameter to the peer.  This command only affects the peer is configured
+other than IPv4 unicast configuration.
+@end deffn
+
+  When remote peer does not have capability negotiation feature, remote
+peer will not send any capabilities at all.  In that case, bgp configures
+the peer with configured capabilities.
+
+  You may prefer locally configured capabilities more than the negotiated
+capabilities even though remote peer sends capabilities.  If the peer is
+configured by @command{override-capability}, @command{bgpd} ignores received
+capabilities then override negotiated capabilities with configured values.
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} override-capability} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} override-capability} {}
+Override the result of Capability Negotiation with local configuration.
+Ignore remote peer's capability value.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Route Reflector, Route Server, Capability Negotiation, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Route Reflector
+
+@deffn {BGP} {bgp cluster-id @var{a.b.c.d}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {BGP} {neighbor @var{peer} route-reflector-client} {}
+@deffnx {BGP} {no neighbor @var{peer} route-reflector-client} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Route Server, How to set up a 6-Bone connection, Route Reflector, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Route Server
+
+At an Internet Exchange point, many ISPs are connected to each other by
+external BGP peering.  Normally these external BGP connection are done by
+@code{full mesh} method.  As with internal BGP full mesh formation,
+this method has a scaling problem.
+
+This scaling problem is well known.  Route Server is a method to resolve
+the problem.  Each ISP's BGP router only peers to Route Server.  Route
+Server serves as BGP information exchange to other BGP routers.  By
+applying this method, numbers of BGP connections is reduced from
+O(n*(n-1)/2) to O(n).
+
+Unlike normal BGP router, Route Server must have several routing tables
+for managing different routing policies for each BGP speaker.  We call the
+routing tables as different @code{view}s.  @command{bgpd} can work as
+normal BGP router or Route Server or both at the same time.
+
+@menu
+* Multiple instance::           
+* BGP instance and view::       
+* Routing policy::              
+* Viewing the view::            
+@end menu
+
+@node Multiple instance, BGP instance and view, Route Server, Route Server
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Multiple instance
+
+To enable multiple view function of @code{bgpd}, you must turn on
+multiple instance feature beforehand.
+
+@deffn {Command} {bgp multiple-instance} {}
+Enable BGP multiple instance feature.  After this feature is enabled,
+you can make multiple BGP instances or multiple BGP views.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {no bgp multiple-instance} {}
+Disable BGP multiple instance feature.  You can not disable this feature
+when BGP multiple instances or views exist.
+@end deffn
+
+When you want to make configuration more Cisco like one, 
+
+@deffn {Command} {bgp config-type cisco} {}
+Cisco compatible BGP configuration output.
+@end deffn
+
+When bgp config-type cisco is specified, 
+
+``no synchronization'' is displayed.
+``no auto-summary'' is desplayed.
+
+``network'' and ``aggregate-address'' argument is displayed as
+``A.B.C.D M.M.M.M''
+
+Zebra: network 10.0.0.0/8
+Cisco: network 10.0.0.0
+
+Zebra: aggregate-address 192.168.0.0/24
+Cisco: aggregate-address 192.168.0.0 255.255.255.0
+
+Community attribute handling is also different.  If there is no
+configuration is specified community attribute and extended community
+attribute are sent to neighbor.  When user manually disable the
+feature community attribute is not sent to the neighbor.  In case of
+``bgp config-type cisco'' is specified, community attribute is not
+sent to the neighbor by default.  To send community attribute user has
+to specify ``neighbor A.B.C.D send-community'' command.
+
+!
+router bgp 1
+ neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 1
+ no neighbor 10.0.0.1 send-community
+!
+
+!
+router bgp 1
+ neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 1
+ neighbor 10.0.0.1 send-community
+!
+
+@deffn {Command} {bgp config-type zebra} {}
+Zebra style BGP configuration.  This is default.
+@end deffn
+
+@node BGP instance and view, Routing policy, Multiple instance, Route Server
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection BGP instance and view
+
+BGP instance is a normal BGP process.  The result of route selection
+goes to the kernel routing table.  You can setup different AS at the
+same time when BGP multiple instance feature is enabled.
+
+@deffn {Command} {router bgp @var{as-number}} {}
+Make a new BGP instance.  You can use arbitrary word for the @var{name}.
+@end deffn
+
+@example
+@group
+bgp multiple-instance
+!
+router bgp 1
+ neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 2
+ neighbor 10.0.0.2 remote-as 3
+!
+router bgp 2
+ neighbor 10.0.0.3 remote-as 4
+ neighbor 10.0.0.4 remote-as 5
+@end group
+@end example
+
+BGP view is almost same as normal BGP process. The result of
+route selection does not go to the kernel routing table.  BGP view is
+only for exchanging BGP routing information.
+
+@deffn {Command} {router bgp @var{as-number} view @var{name}} {}
+Make a new BGP view.  You can use arbitrary word for the @var{name}.  This
+view's route selection result does not go to the kernel routing table.
+@end deffn
+
+With this command, you can setup Route Server like below.
+
+@example
+@group
+bgp multiple-instance
+!
+router bgp 1 view 1
+ neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 2
+ neighbor 10.0.0.2 remote-as 3
+!
+router bgp 2 view 2
+ neighbor 10.0.0.3 remote-as 4
+ neighbor 10.0.0.4 remote-as 5
+@end group
+@end example
+
+@node Routing policy, Viewing the view, BGP instance and view, Route Server
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Routing policy
+
+You can set different routing policy for a peer.  For example, you can
+set different filter for a peer.
+
+@example
+@group
+bgp multiple-instance
+!
+router bgp 1 view 1
+ neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 2
+ neighbor 10.0.0.1 distribute-list 1 in
+!
+router bgp 1 view 2
+ neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 2
+ neighbor 10.0.0.1 distribute-list 2 in
+@end group
+@end example
+
+This means BGP update from a peer 10.0.0.1 goes to both BGP view 1 and view
+2.  When the update is inserted into view 1, distribute-list 1 is
+applied.  On the other hand, when the update is inserted into view 2,
+distribute-list 2 is applied.
+
+@node Viewing the view,  , Routing policy, Route Server
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Viewing the view
+
+To display routing table of BGP view, you must specify view name.
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip bgp view @var{name}} {}
+Display routing table of BGP view @var{name}.
+@end deffn
+
+@node How to set up a 6-Bone connection, Dump BGP packets and table, Route Server, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section How to set up a 6-Bone connection
+
+@example
+@group
+zebra configuration 
+=================== 
+!  
+! Actually there is no need to configure zebra 
+!
+
+bgpd configuration
+==================
+!
+! This means that routes go through zebra and into the kernel.
+!
+router zebra
+!
+! MP-BGP configuration
+!
+router bgp 7675
+ bgp router-id 10.0.0.1
+ neighbor 3ffe:1cfa:0:2:2a0:c9ff:fe9e:f56 remote-as @var{as-number}
+!
+ address-family ipv6
+ network 3ffe:506::/32
+ neighbor 3ffe:1cfa:0:2:2a0:c9ff:fe9e:f56 activate
+ neighbor 3ffe:1cfa:0:2:2a0:c9ff:fe9e:f56 route-map set-nexthop out
+ neighbor 3ffe:1cfa:0:2:2c0:4fff:fe68:a231 remote-as @var{as-number}
+ neighbor 3ffe:1cfa:0:2:2c0:4fff:fe68:a231 route-map set-nexthop out
+ exit-address-family
+!
+ipv6 access-list all permit any
+!
+! Set output nexthop address.
+!
+route-map set-nexthop permit 10
+ match ipv6 address all
+ set ipv6 nexthop global 3ffe:1cfa:0:2:2c0:4fff:fe68:a225
+ set ipv6 nexthop local fe80::2c0:4fff:fe68:a225
+!
+! logfile FILENAME is obsolete.  Please use log file FILENAME
+!
+log file bgpd.log
+!
+@end group
+@end example
+
+@node Dump BGP packets and table,  , How to set up a 6-Bone connection, BGP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Dump BGP packets and table
+
+@deffn Command {dump bgp all @var{path}} {}
+@deffnx Command {dump bgp all @var{path} @var{interval}} {}
+Dump all BGP packet and events to @var{path} file.
+@end deffn 
+
+@deffn Command {dump bgp updates @var{path}} {}
+@deffnx Command {dump bgp updates @var{path} @var{interval}} {}
+Dump BGP updates to @var{path} file.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {dump bgp routes @var{path}} {}
+@deffnx Command {dump bgp routes @var{path}} {}
+Dump whole BGP routing table to @var{path}.  This is heavy process.
+@end deffn
diff --git a/doc/draft-zebra-00.ms b/doc/draft-zebra-00.ms
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2599472
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/draft-zebra-00.ms
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+.pl 10.0i
+.po 0
+.ll 7.2i
+.lt 7.2i
+.nr LL 7.2i
+.nr LT 7.2i
+.ds LF Ishiguro
+.ds RF FORMFEED[Page %]
+.ds CF
+.ds LH RFC DRAFT
+.ds RH March 1998
+.ds CH
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+Network Working Group                                        K. Ishiguro
+Request for Comments: DRAFT                     Digital Magic Labs, Inc.
+                                                              March 1998
+.sp 2
+.ce
+Zebra Protocol Draft
+.sp 2
+.fi
+.ne 4
+Status of this Memo
+.sp
+.in 3
+This draft is very eary beta version.
+.sp
+.in 0
+.ne 4
+Introduction
+.sp
+.in 3
+The zebra protocol is a communication protocol between kernel
+routing table manager and routing protocol daemon. It is built over
+TCP/IP protocol suite.
+.sp
+.in 0
+.ne 4
+Request message formats
+.sp
+.in 3
+zebra is TCP-based protocol.
+.sp
+Below is request packet format.
+.sp
+.in 0
+.DS
+0                   1                   2                   3
+0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|           Length (2)          |   Command (1) |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+.DE
+.sp
+.in 3
+Length is total packet length.
+.sp
+Here is summary of command list.
+.sp
+.in 0
+.DS
+1 - ZEBRA_IPV4_ROUTE_ADD
+2 - ZEBRA_IPV4_ROUTE_DELETE
+3 - ZEBRA_IPV6_ROUTE_ADD
+4 - ZEBRA_IPV6_ROUTE_DELETE
+5 - ZEBRA_GET_ONE_INTERFACE
+6 - ZEBRA_GET_ALL_INTERFACE
+7 - ZEBRA_GET_HOSTINFO
+.DE
+.sp
+.in 0
+.ne 4
+IPv4 reply message formats
+.sp
+.in 0
+.DS
+0                   1                   2                   3
+0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|    Type (1)   |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                            Gateway (4)                        |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+.DE
+.sp
+.in 3
+Type field specify route's origin type.
+.sp
+.in 0
+.DS
+1 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_RESERVE
+2 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_CONNECT
+3 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_STATIC
+4 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_RIP
+5 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_RIPNG
+6 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_BGP
+7 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_RADIX
+.DE
+.sp
+.in 3
+After above message there can be variale length IPv4 prefix data.
+Each IPv4 prefix is encoded as a two tuple of the form <masklength,
+prefix>
+.sp
+.in 0
+.DS
++----------------------+
+|Subnet mask (1 octet) |
++----------------------+
+|IPv4 prefix (variable)|
++----------------------+
+.DE
+.sp
+.in 0
+.ne 4
+IPv6 reply message formats
+.sp
+.in 0
+.DS
+0                   1                   2                   3
+0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|    Type (1)   |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                                                               |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                           Gateway (16)                        |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                                                               |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                                                               |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+.DE
+.sp
+.in 3
+Type field specify route's origin type.
+.sp
+.in 0
+.DS
+1 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_RESERVE
+2 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_CONNECT
+3 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_STATIC
+4 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_RIP
+5 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_RIPNG
+6 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_BGP
+7 - ZEBRA_ROUTE_RADIX
+.DE
+.sp
+.in 0
+.DS
++----------------------+
+|  ifindex   (4 octet) |
++----------------------+
+|  prefixlen  (1 octet)|
++----------------------+
+|IPv6 prefix (variable)|
++----------------------+
+.DE
+.sp
+.in 3
+I am not sure but it seems some operation systems IPv6
+implementation may need interface index when add and delete
+linklocal routes.
+.sp
+I have added ifindex field to specify IPv6 routes interface
+index. If this index is value zero, it will ignored.
+.sp
+.in 0
+.ne 4
+Interface information message format.
+.sp
+.in 0
+.DS
+0                   1                   2                   3
+0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                      Interface name (20)                      |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|   Index (1)   |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                       Inteface flag (4)                       |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                      Inteface metric (4)                      |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                        Inteface MTU (4)                       |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|                    Inteface Address count (4)                 |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+.DE
+.sp
+.in 3
+Address message format.
+.sp
+.in 0
+.ne 4
+Host inforamtion message format.
+.sp
+.in 0
+.DS
+0                   1                   2                   3
+0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|IPv4 forwarding|IPv6 forwarding|
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+.DE
+.sp
+.in 3
+Host information contain IPv4/IPv6 forwarding information.
diff --git a/doc/filter.texi b/doc/filter.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1bc70cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/filter.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,192 @@
+@node Filtering
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Filtering
+
+Zebra provides many very flexible filtering features.  Filtering is used
+for both input and output of the routing information.  Once filtering is
+defined, it can be applied in any direction.
+
+@menu
+* IP Access List::              
+* IP Prefix List::              
+@end menu
+
+@node IP Access List, IP Prefix List, Filtering, Filtering
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection IP Access List
+
+@deffn {Command} {access-list @var{name} permit @var{ipv4-network}} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {access-list @var{name} deny @var{ipv4-network}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+Basic filtering is done by @code{access-list} as shown in the
+following example.
+
+@example
+access-list filter deny 10.0.0.0/9
+access-list filter permit 10.0.0.0/8
+@end example
+
+@node IP Prefix List,  , IP Access List, Filtering
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection IP Prefix List
+
+@command{ip prefix-list} provides the most powerful prefix based
+filtering mechanism.  In addition to @command{access-list} functionality,
+@command{ip prefix-list} has prefix length range specification and
+sequential number specification.  You can add or delete prefix based
+filters to arbitrary points of prefix-list using sequential number specification.
+
+If no ip prefix-list is specified, it acts as permit.  If @command{ip prefix-list} 
+is defined, and no match is found, default deny is applied.
+
+@c @deffn {Command} {ip prefix-list @var{name} [seq @var{number}] permit|deny [le @var{prefixlen}] [ge @var{prefixlen}]} {}
+@deffn {Command} {ip prefix-list @var{name} (permit|deny) @var{prefix} [le @var{len}] [ge @var{len}]} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {ip prefix-list @var{name} seq @var{number} (permit|deny) @var{prefix} [le @var{len}] [ge @var{len}]} {}
+
+You can create @command{ip prefix-list} using above commands.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @asis{seq}
+seq @var{number} can be set either automatically or manually.  In the
+case that sequential numbers are set manually, the user may pick any
+number less than 4294967295.  In the case that sequential number are set
+automatically, the sequential number will increase by a unit of five (5)
+per list.  If a list with no specified sequential number is created
+after a list with a specified sequential number, the list will
+automatically pick the next multiple of five (5) as the list number.
+For example, if a list with number 2 already exists and a new list with
+no specified number is created, the next list will be numbered 5.  If
+lists 2 and 7 already exist and a new list with no specified number is
+created, the new list will be numbered 10.
+
+@item @asis{le}
+@command{le} command specifies prefix length.  The prefix list will be 
+applied if the prefix length is less than or equal to the le prefix length.
+
+@item @asis{ge}
+@command{ge} command specifies prefix length.  The prefix list will be 
+applied if the prefix length is greater than or equal to the ge prefix length.
+
+@end table
+
+@end deffn
+
+Less than or equal to prefix numbers and greater than or equal to
+prefix numbers can be used together.  The order of the le and ge
+commands does not matter.
+
+If a prefix list with a different sequential number but with the exact
+same rules as a previous list is created, an error will result.
+However, in the case that the sequential number and the rules are
+exactly similar, no error will result.
+
+If a list with the same sequential number as a previous list is created,
+the new list will overwrite the old list.
+
+Matching of IP Prefix is performed from the smaller sequential number to the
+larger.  The matching will stop once any rule has been applied.
+
+In the case of no le or ge command, 
+
+Version 0.85: the matching rule will apply to all prefix lengths that
+matched the prefix list.
+
+Version 0.86 or later: In the case of no le or ge command, the prefix
+length must match exactly the length specified in the prefix list.
+
+
+@deffn {Command} {no ip prefix-list @var{name}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@menu
+* ip prefix-list description::  
+* ip prefix-list sequential number control::  
+* Showing ip prefix-list::      
+* Clear counter of ip prefix-list::  
+@end menu
+
+@node ip prefix-list description, ip prefix-list sequential number control, IP Prefix List, IP Prefix List
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection ip prefix-list description
+
+@deffn {Command} {ip prefix-list @var{name} description @var{desc}} {}
+Descriptions may be added to prefix lists.  This command adds a
+description to the prefix list.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {no ip prefix-list @var{name} description [@var{desc}]} {}
+Deletes the description from a prefix list.  It is possible to use the
+command without the full description.
+@end deffn
+
+@node  ip prefix-list sequential number control, Showing ip prefix-list, ip prefix-list description, IP Prefix List
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection ip prefix-list sequential number control
+
+@deffn {Command} {ip prefix-list sequence-number} {}
+With this command, the IP prefix list sequential number is displayed.
+This is the default behavior.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {no ip prefix-list sequence-number} {}
+With this command, the IP prefix list sequential number is not
+displayed.
+@end deffn
+
+@node  Showing ip prefix-list, Clear counter of ip prefix-list, ip prefix-list sequential number control, IP Prefix List
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection Showing ip prefix-list
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip prefix-list} {}
+Display all IP prefix lists.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip prefix-list @var{name}} {}
+Show IP prefix list can be used with a prefix list name.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip prefix-list @var{name} seq @var{num}} {}
+Show IP prefix list can be used with a prefix list name and sequential
+number.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip prefix-list @var{name} @var{a.b.c.d/m}} {}
+If the command longer is used, all prefix lists with prefix lengths equal to
+or longer than the specified length will be displayed.
+If the command first match is used, the first prefix length match will be
+displayed.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip prefix-list @var{name} @var{a.b.c.d/m} longer} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip prefix-list @var{name} @var{a.b.c.d/m} first-match} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip prefix-list summary} {}
+@end deffn
+@deffn {Command} {show ip prefix-list summary @var{name}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip prefix-list detail} {}
+@end deffn
+@deffn {Command} {show ip prefix-list detail @var{name}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node  Clear counter of ip prefix-list,  , Showing ip prefix-list, IP Prefix List
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsubsection Clear counter of ip prefix-list
+
+@deffn {Command} {clear ip prefix-list} {}
+Clears the counters of all IP prefix lists.  Clear IP Prefix List can be
+used with a specified name and prefix.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {clear ip prefix-list @var{name}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {clear ip prefix-list @var{name} @var{a.b.c.d/m}} {}
+@end deffn
+
diff --git a/doc/install.texi b/doc/install.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72c826d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/install.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+@node  Installation, Basic commands, Overview, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Installation
+
+@cindex How to install Zebra
+@cindex Installation
+@cindex Installing Zebra
+@cindex Building the system
+@cindex Making Zebra
+
+  There are three steps for installing the software: configuration,
+compilation, and installation.
+
+@menu
+* Configure the Software::      
+* Build the Software::          
+* Install the Software::        
+@end menu
+
+  The easiest way to get Zebra running is to issue the following
+commands:
+
+@example
+% configure
+% make
+% make install
+@end example
+
+@node Configure the Software, Build the Software, Installation, Installation
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Configure the Software
+
+@cindex Configuration options
+@cindex Options for configuring
+@cindex Build options
+@cindex Distribution configuration
+@cindex Options to @code{./configure}
+ 
+  Zebra has an excellent configure script which
+automatically detects most host configurations.  There are several
+additional configure options you can use to turn off IPv6 support, to
+disable the compilation of specific daemons, and to enable SNMP support.
+
+@table @option
+@item --enable-guile
+Turn on compilation of the zebra-guile interpreter.  You will need the
+guile library to make this.  zebra-guile implementation is not yet
+finished.  So this option is only useful for zebra-guile developers.
+@item --disable-ipv6
+Turn off IPv6 related features and daemons.  Zebra configure script
+automatically detects IPv6 stack.  But sometimes you might want to
+disable IPv6 support of Zebra.
+@item --disable-zebra
+Do not build zebra daemon.
+@item --disable-ripd
+Do not build ripd.
+@item --disable-ripngd
+Do not build ripngd.
+@item --disable-ospfd
+Do not build ospfd.
+@item --disable-ospf6d
+Do not build ospf6d.
+@item --disable-bgpd
+Do not build bgpd.
+@item --disable-bgp-announce
+Make @command{bgpd} which does not make bgp announcements at all.  This
+feature is good for using @command{bgpd} as a BGP announcement listener.
+@item --enable-netlink
+Force to enable @sc{gnu}/Linux netlink interface.  Zebra configure
+script detects netlink interface by checking a header file.  When the header
+file does not match to the current running kernel, configure script will
+not turn on netlink support.
+@item --enable-snmp
+Enable SNMP support.  By default, SNMP support is disabled.
+@end table
+
+You may specify any combination of the above options to the configure
+script.  By default, the executables are placed in @file{/usr/local/sbin} 
+and the configuration files in @file{/usr/local/etc}. The @file{/usr/local/}
+installation prefix and other directories may be changed using the following 
+options to the configuration script.
+
+@table @option
+@item --prefix=@var{prefix}
+Install architecture-independent files in @var{prefix} [/usr/local].
+@item --sysconfdir=@var{dir}
+Read-only sample configuration file in @var{dir} [@var{prefix}/etc].
+@end table
+
+@example
+% ./configure --disable-ipv6
+@end example
+
+This command will configure zebra and the routing daemons.
+
+@cindex Configuring Zebra
+@cindex Configuration the software build
+@cindex Building on Linux boxes
+@cindex Linux configurations
+
+There are several options available only to @sc{gnu}/Linux systems:
+@footnote{GNU/Linux has very flexible kernel configuration features.  If
+you use GNU/Linux, make sure that the current kernel configuration is
+what you want.  Zebra will run with any kernel configuration but some
+recommendations do exist.
+
+@table @var
+
+@item CONFIG_NETLINK
+Kernel/User netlink socket.  
+This is a brand new feature which enables
+an advanced interface between the Linux kernel and Zebra (@pxref{Kernel Interface}).
+
+@item CONFIG_RTNETLINK
+Routing messages.
+This makes it possible to receive netlink routing messages.  If you
+specify this option, @command{zebra} can detect routing information
+updates directly from the kernel (@pxref{Kernel Interface}).
+
+@item CONFIG_IP_MULTICAST
+IP: multicasting.  
+This option should be specified when you use @command{ripd} or
+@command{ospfd} because these protocols use multicast.
+
+@end table
+
+IPv6 support has been added in @sc{gnu}/Linux kernel version 2.2.  If you
+try to use the Zebra IPv6 feature on a @sc{gnu}/Linux kernel, please
+make sure the following libraries have been installed.  Please note that
+these libraries will not be needed when you uses @sc{gnu} C library 2.1
+or upper.
+
+@table @code
+
+@item inet6-apps
+The @code{inet6-apps} package includes basic IPv6 related libraries such
+as @code{inet_ntop} and @code{inet_pton}.  Some basic IPv6 programs such
+as @command{ping}, @command{ftp}, and @command{inetd} are also
+included. The @code{inet-apps} can be found at
+@url{ftp://ftp.inner.net/pub/ipv6/}.
+
+@item net-tools
+The @code{net-tools} package provides an IPv6 enabled interface and
+routing utility.  It contains @command{ifconfig}, @command{route},
+@command{netstat}, and other tools.  @code{net-tools} may be found at
+@url{http://www.tazenda.demon.co.uk/phil/net-tools/}.
+
+@end table
+@c A - end of footnote 
+}.
+
+@node Build the Software, Install the Software, Configure the Software, Installation
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Build the Software
+
+After configuring the software, you will need to compile it for your
+system. Simply issue the command @command{make} in the root of the source
+directory and the software will be compiled. If you have *any* problems
+at this stage, be certain to send a bug report @xref{Bug Reports}.
+
+@example
+% ./configure
+.
+.
+.
+./configure output
+.
+.
+.
+% make
+@end example
+@c A - End of node, Building the Software
+
+
+@node Install the Software,  , Build the Software, Installation
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Install the Software
+
+Installing the software to your system consists of copying the compiled
+programs and supporting files to a standard location. After the
+installation process has completed, these files have been copied
+from your work directory to @file{/usr/local/bin}, and @file{/usr/local/etc}.
+
+To install the Zebra suite, issue the following command at your shell
+prompt: @command{make install}.
+
+@example
+%
+% make install
+%
+@end example
+
+@c A - removed this section and placed it with Install the Software
+@c @node Additional Notes,  , Install the Software, Installation
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@c @section Additional Notes
+
+Zebra daemons have their own terminal interface or VTY.  After
+installation, you have to setup each beast's port number to connect to
+them.  Please add the following entries to @file{/etc/services}.
+
+@example
+zebrasrv      2600/tcp		  # zebra service
+zebra         2601/tcp		  # zebra vty
+ripd          2602/tcp		  # RIPd vty
+ripngd        2603/tcp		  # RIPngd vty
+ospfd         2604/tcp		  # OSPFd vty
+bgpd          2605/tcp		  # BGPd vty
+ospf6d        2606/tcp		  # OSPF6d vty
+@end example
+
+If you use a FreeBSD newer than 2.2.8, the above entries are already
+added to @file{/etc/services} so there is no need to add it. If you
+specify a port number when starting the daemon, these entries may not be
+needed.
+
+You may need to make changes to the config files in
+@file{@value{INSTALL_PREFIX_ETC}/*.conf}. @xref{Config Commands}.
diff --git a/doc/ipv6.texi b/doc/ipv6.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c24d145
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/ipv6.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+@node IPv6 Support, Kernel Interface, Route Map, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter IPv6 Support
+
+Zebra fully supports IPv6 routing.  As described so far, Zebra supports
+RIPng, OSPFv3 and BGP-4+.  You can give IPv6 addresses to an interface
+and configure static IPv6 routing information.  Zebra-IPv6 also provides
+automatic address configuration via a feature called @code{address
+auto configuration}.  To do it, the router must send router advertisement
+messages to the all nodes that exist on the network.
+
+@menu
+* Router Advertisement::        
+@end menu
+
+@node Router Advertisement,  , IPv6 Support, IPv6 Support
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Router Advertisement
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ipv6 nd send-ra} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ipv6 nd prefix-advertisement @var{ipv6prefix}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@example
+@group
+interface eth0
+ ipv6 nd send-ra
+ ipv6 nd prefix-advertisement 3ffe:506:5009::/64
+@end group
+@end example
diff --git a/doc/kernel.texi b/doc/kernel.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b863a1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kernel.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+@node Kernel Interface, SNMP Support, IPv6 Support, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Kernel Interface
+
+There are several different methods for reading kernel routing table
+information, updating kernel routing tables, and for looking up
+interfaces.
+
+@table @samp
+
+@item ioctl
+The @samp{ioctl} method is a very traditional way for reading or writing
+kernel information.  @samp{ioctl} can be used for looking up interfaces
+and for modifying interface addresses, flags, mtu settings and other
+types of information.  Also, @samp{ioctl} can insert and delete kernel
+routing table entries.  It will soon be available on almost any platform
+which zebra supports, but it is a little bit ugly thus far, so if a
+better method is supported by the kernel, zebra will use that.
+
+@item sysctl
+@samp{sysctl} can lookup kernel information using MIB (Management
+Information Base) syntax.  Normally, it only provides a way of getting
+information from the kernel.  So one would usually want to change kernel
+information using another method such as @samp{ioctl}.
+
+@item proc filesystem
+@samp{proc filesystem} provides an easy way of getting kernel
+information.
+
+@item routing socket
+
+@item netlink
+On recent Linux kernels (2.0.x and 2.2.x), there is a kernel/user
+communication support called @code{netlink}.  It makes asynchronous
+communication between kernel and Zebra possible, similar to a routing
+socket on BSD systems.
+
+Before you use this feature, be sure to select (in kernel configuration) 
+the kernel/netlink support option 'Kernel/User network link driver' and 
+'Routing messages'.
+
+Today, the /dev/route special device file is obsolete.  Netlink
+communication is done by reading/writing over netlink socket.
+
+After the kernel configuration, please reconfigure and rebuild Zebra.
+You can use netlink as a dynamic routing update channel between Zebra
+and the kernel.
+@end table
diff --git a/doc/main.texi b/doc/main.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7043bf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/main.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
+@node Zebra
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Zebra
+
+@c SYNOPSIS
+@command{zebra} is an IP routing manager.  It provides kernel routing
+table updates, interface lookups, and redistribution of routes between
+different routing protocols.
+
+@menu
+* Invoking zebra::              Running the program
+* Interface Commands::          Commands for zebra interfaces
+* Static Route Commands::       Commands for adding static routes
+* zebra Terminal Mode Commands::  Commands for zebra's VTY
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Invoking zebra, Interface Commands, Zebra, Zebra
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Invoking zebra
+
+Besides the common invocation options (@pxref{Common Invocation Options}), the
+@command{zebra} specific invocation options are listed below.
+
+@table @samp
+@item -b
+@itemx --batch
+Runs in batch mode.  @command{zebra} parses configuration file and terminates
+immediately.
+
+@item -k
+@itemx --keep_kernel
+When zebra starts up, don't delete old self inserted routes.
+
+@item -l
+@itemx --log_mode
+Set verbose logging on.
+
+@item -r
+@itemx --retain
+When program terminates, retain routes added by zebra.
+
+@end table
+
+@node Interface Commands, Static Route Commands, Invoking zebra, Zebra
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Interface Commands
+
+@deffn Command {interface @var{ifname}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {shutdown} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no shutdown} {}
+Up or down the current interface.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ip address @var{address}} {}
+Set ip address for the interface.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {description @var{description} ...} {}
+Set description for the interface.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {multicast} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no multicast} {}
+Enable or disables multicast flag for the interface.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {bandwidth <1-10000000>} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no bandwidth <1-10000000>} {}
+Set bandwidth value to the interface.  This is for calculating OSPF
+cost.  This command does not affect the actual device configuration.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Static Route Commands, zebra Terminal Mode Commands, Interface Commands, Zebra
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Static Route Commands
+
+Static routing is a very fundamental feature of routing technology.  It
+defines static prefix and gateway.
+
+@deffn Command {ip route @var{network} @var{gateway}} {}
+@var{network} is destination prefix with format of A.B.C.D/M.
+@var{gateway} is gateway for the prefix.  When @var{gateway} is
+A.B.C.D format.  It is taken as a IPv4 address gateway.  Otherwise it
+is treated as an interface name.
+
+@example
+ip route 10.0.0.0/8 10.0.0.2
+ip route 10.0.0.0/8 ppp0
+@end example
+
+First example defines 10.0.0.0/8 static route with gateway 10.0.0.2.
+Second one defines the same prefix but with gateway to interface ppp0.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {ip route @var{network} @var{netmask} @var{gateway}} {}
+This is alternate version of above command.  When @var{network} is
+A.B.C.D format, user must define @var{netmask} value with A.B.C.D
+format.  @var{gateway} is same option as above command
+
+@example
+ip route 10.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 10.0.0.2
+ip route 10.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 ppp0
+@end example
+
+This is a same setting using this statement.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {ip route @var{network} @var{gateway} @var{distance}} {}
+
+@end deffn
+
+Multiple nexthop static route
+
+@example
+ip route 10.0.0.1/32 10.0.0.2
+ip route 10.0.0.1/32 10.0.0.3
+ip route 10.0.0.1/32 eth0
+@end example
+
+If there is no route to 10.0.0.2 and 10.0.0.3, and interface eth0
+is reachable, then the last route is installed into the kernel.
+
+@example
+zebra> show ip route
+S>  10.0.0.1/32 [1/0] via 10.0.0.2 inactive
+                      via 10.0.0.3 inactive
+  *                   is directly connected, eth0
+@end example
+
+Floating static route
+
+@deffn Command {ipv6 route @var{network} @var{gateway}} {}
+
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {ipv6 route @var{network} @var{gateway} @var{distance}} {}
+
+@end deffn
+
+
+@deffn Command {table @var{tableno}} {}
+Select the primary kernel routing table to be used.  This only works
+for kernels supporting multiple routing tables (like GNU/Linux 2.2.x
+and later).  After setting @var{tableno} with this command, 
+static routes defined after this are added to the specified table.
+@end deffn
+
+@node zebra Terminal Mode Commands,  , Static Route Commands, Zebra
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section zebra Terminal Mode Commands
+
+@deffn Command {show ip route} {}
+Display current routes which zebra holds in its database.
+
+@example
+@group
+Router# show ip route 
+Codes: K - kernel route, C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, 
+       B - BGP * - FIB route.
+
+K* 0.0.0.0/0              203.181.89.241
+S  0.0.0.0/0              203.181.89.1
+C* 127.0.0.0/8            lo
+C* 203.181.89.240/28      eth0
+@end group
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {show ipv6 route} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {show interface} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {show ipforward} {}
+Display whether the host's IP forwarding function is enabled or not.
+Almost any UNIX kernel can be configured with IP forwarding disabled.
+If so, the box can't work as a router.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {show ipv6forward} {}
+Display whether the host's IP v6 forwarding is enabled or not.
+@end deffn
diff --git a/doc/ospf6d.8 b/doc/ospf6d.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1882c10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/ospf6d.8
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+.TH OSPF6D 8 "July 2000" "Zebra Beast - OSPF6D" "Version 0.88"
+
+.SH NAME
+ospf6d \- an OSPF routing engine for use with Zebra and IPv6
+
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ospf6d
+[
+.B \-dhv
+]
+[
+.B \-f config-file
+]
+[
+.B \-i pid-file
+]
+[
+.B \-P port-number
+]
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B ospf6d 
+is a routing component that works with the 
+.B zebra
+routing engine.
+\fBospf6d\fR. 
+
+
+.SH OPTIONS
+
+.TP
+\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-daemon\fR
+Runs in daemon mode, forking and exiting from tty.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-config-file \fR\fIconfig-file\fR 
+Specifies the config file to use for startup. If not specified this
+option will likely default to \fB\fI/usr/local/etc/ospf6d.conf\fR.
+ 
+.TP
+\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
+A brief message.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-pid_file \fR\fIpid-file\fR
+When ospf6d starts its process idenifier is written to
+\fB\fIpid-file\fR.  The init system uses the recorded PID to stop or
+restart ospf6d.  The likely default is \fB\fI/var/run/ospf6d.pid\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-P\fR, \fB\-\-vty_port \fR\fIport-number\fR 
+Specify the port that the ospf6d VTY will listen on. This defaults to
+2606, as specified in \fB\fI/etc/services\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR
+Print the version and exit.
+
+
+.SH COMMANDS
+
+\fB router ospf6 \fR
+\fB router zebra \fR -- (Move routes into kernel table)
+
+\fB network [NETWORK] area [OSPF6-AREA-ID] \fR
+\fB no network [NETWORK] \fR
+
+\fB show ip ospf6 interface \fR
+\fB show ip ospf6 neighbor \fR
+\fB show ip ospf6 database \fR
+\fB show ip ospf6 route \fR
+
+\fB debug ospf6 ism \fR
+\fB debug ospf6 packet \fR
+\fB debug ospf6 nsm \fR
+
+
+
+.SH FILES
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/sbin/ospf6d
+The default location of the 
+.B ospf6d
+binary.
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/etc/ospf6d.conf
+The default location of the 
+.B ospf6d
+config file.
+
+.TP
+.BI $(PWD)/ospf6d.log 
+If the 
+.B ospf6d
+process is config'd to output logs to a file, then you will find this
+file in the directory where you started \fBospf6d\fR.
+
+
+.SH WARNING
+This man page is intended as a quick reference for command line
+options, and for config file commands. The definitive document is the
+Info file \fBzebra\fR.
+
+
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+The ospf6d process may log to standard output, to a VTY, to a log
+file, or through syslog to the system logs. \fBospf6d\fR supports many
+debugging options, see the Info file, or the source for details.
+
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+References to other related man pages:
+
+ripd(8), ripngd(8), ospfd(8), bgpd(8), zebra(8), vtysh(1)
+
+
+.SH BUGS
+.B ospf6d
+eats bugs for breakfast. If you have food for the maintainers try 
+.BI <bug-zebra@gnu.org>
+
+
+.SH AUTHOR[S]
+See <\fBwww.zebra.org\fR>, or the Info file for an accurate list of authors.
+
diff --git a/doc/ospf6d.texi b/doc/ospf6d.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3ac3d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/ospf6d.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+@node OSPFv3, BGP, OSPFv2, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter OSPFv3
+
+@command{ospf6d} is a daemon support OSPF version 3 for IPv6 network.
+OSPF for IPv6 is described in RFC2740.
+
+@menu
+* OSPF6 router::                
+* OSPF6 area::                  
+* OSPF6 interface::             
+* Redistribute routes to OSPF6::  
+* Showing OSPF6 information::   
+@end menu
+
+@node OSPF6 router, OSPF6 area, OSPFv3, OSPFv3
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section OSPF6 router
+
+@deffn {Command} {router ospf6} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF6 Command} {router-id @var{a.b.c.d}} {}
+Set router's Router-ID.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF6 Command} {interface @var{ifname} area @var{area}} {}
+Bind interface to specified area, and start sending OSPF packets.  @var{area} can
+be specified as 0.
+@end deffn
+
+@node OSPF6 area, OSPF6 interface, OSPF6 router, OSPFv3
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section OSPF6 area
+
+Area support for OSPFv3 is not yet implemented.
+
+@node OSPF6 interface, Redistribute routes to OSPF6, OSPF6 area, OSPFv3
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section OSPF6 interface
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ipv6 ospf6 cost COST} {}
+Sets interface's output cost.  Default value is 1.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ipv6 ospf6 hello-interval HELLOINTERVAL} {}
+Sets interface's Hello Interval.  Default 40
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ipv6 ospf6 dead-interval DEADINTERVAL} {}
+Sets interface's Router Dead Interval.  Default value is 40.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ipv6 ospf6 retransmit-interval RETRANSMITINTERVAL} {}
+Sets interface's Rxmt Interval.  Default value is 5.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ipv6 ospf6 priority PRIORITY} {}
+Sets interface's Router Priority.  Default value is 1.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ipv6 ospf6 transmit-delay TRANSMITDELAY} {}
+Sets interface's Inf-Trans-Delay.  Default value is 1.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Redistribute routes to OSPF6, Showing OSPF6 information, OSPF6 interface, OSPFv3
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Redistribute routes to OSPF6
+
+@deffn {OSPF6 Command} {redistribute static} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF6 Command} {redistribute connected} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF6 Command} {redistribute ripng} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Showing OSPF6 information,  , Redistribute routes to OSPF6, OSPFv3
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Showing OSPF6 information
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ipv6 ospf6 [INSTANCE_ID]} {}
+INSTANCE_ID is an optional OSPF instance ID. To see router ID and OSPF
+instance ID, simply type "show ipv6 ospf6 <cr>".
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ipv6 ospf6 database} {}
+This command shows LSA database summary.  You can specify the type of LSA.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ipv6 ospf6 interface} {}
+To see OSPF interface configuration like costs.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ipv6 ospf6 neighbor} {}
+Shows state and chosen (Backup) DR of neighbor.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ipv6 ospf6 request-list A.B.C.D} {}
+Shows requestlist of neighbor.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ipv6 route ospf6} {}
+This command shows internal routing table.
+@end deffn
diff --git a/doc/ospfd.8 b/doc/ospfd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0fbfce4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/ospfd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+.TH OSPFD 8 "July 2000" "Zebra Beast - OSPFD" "Version 0.88"
+
+.SH NAME
+ospfd \- an OSPF v2 routing engine for use with Zebra
+
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ospfd
+[
+.B \-dhlv
+]
+[
+.B \-f config-file
+]
+[
+.B \-i pid-file
+]
+[
+.B \-P port-number
+]
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B ospfd 
+is a routing component that works with the 
+.B zebra
+routing engine.
+
+
+.SH OPTIONS
+
+.TP
+\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-daemon\fR
+Runs in daemon mode, forking and exiting from tty.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-config-file \fR\fIconfig-file\fR 
+Specifies the config file to use for startup. If not specified this
+option will likely default to \fB\fI/usr/local/etc/ospfd.conf\fR.
+ 
+.TP
+\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
+A brief message.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-pid_file \fR\fIpid-file\fR
+When ospfd starts its process idenifier is written to
+\fB\fIpid-file\fR.  The init system uses the recorded PID to stop or
+restart ospfd.  The likely default is \fB\fI/var/run/ospfd.pid\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-log_mode\fR
+Turn verbose logging on.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-P\fR, \fB\-\-vty_port \fR\fIport-number\fR 
+Specify the port that the ospfd VTY will listen on. This defaults to
+2604, as specified in \fB\fI/etc/services\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR
+Print the version and exit.
+
+
+.SH COMMANDS
+
+\fB router ospf \fR
+\fB router zebra \fR -- (Move routes into kernel table)
+
+\fB network [NETWORK] area [OSPF-AREA-ID] \fR
+\fB no network [NETWORK] \fR
+
+\fB show ip ospf interface \fR
+\fB show ip ospf neighbor \fR
+\fB show ip ospf database \fR
+\fB show ip ospf route \fR
+
+
+\fB debug ospf ism \fR
+\fB debug ospf packet \fR
+\fB debug ospf nsm \fR
+
+
+
+.SH FILES
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/sbin/ospfd
+The default location of the 
+.B ospfd
+binary.
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/etc/ospfd.conf
+The default location of the 
+.B ospfd
+config file.
+
+.TP
+.BI $(PWD)/ospfd.log 
+If the 
+.B ospfd
+process is config'd to output logs to a file, then you will find this
+file in the directory where you started \fBospfd\fR.
+
+
+.SH WARNING
+This man page is intended as a quick reference for command line
+options, and for config file commands. The definitive document is the
+Info file \fBzebra\fR.
+
+
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+The ospfd process may log to standard output, to a VTY, to a log
+file, or through syslog to the system logs. \fBospfd\fR supports many
+debugging options, see the Info file, or the source for details.
+
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+References to other related man pages:
+
+ripd(8), ripngd(8), ospf6d(8), bgpd(8), zebra(8), vtysh(1)
+
+
+.SH BUGS
+.B ospfd
+eats bugs for breakfast. If you have food for the maintainers try 
+.BI <bug-zebra@gnu.org>
+
+
+.SH AUTHOR[S]
+See <\fBwww.zebra.org\fR>, or the Info file for an accurate list of authors.
+
diff --git a/doc/ospfd.texi b/doc/ospfd.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5952c05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/ospfd.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,345 @@
+@node OSPFv2, OSPFv3, RIPng, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter OSPFv2
+
+  OSPF version 2 is a routing protocol which described in
+@asis{RFC2328} - @cite{OSPF Version 2}.  OSPF is IGP (Interior Gateway
+Protocols).  Compared with RIP, OSPF can provide scalable network
+support and faster convergence time.  OSPF is widely used in large
+networks such as ISP backbone and enterprise networks.
+
+@menu
+* Configuring ospfd::           
+* OSPF router::                 
+* OSPF area::                   
+* OSPF interface::              
+* Redistribute routes to OSPF::  
+* Showing OSPF information::    
+* Debugging OSPF::              
+@end menu
+
+@node Configuring ospfd, OSPF router, OSPFv2, OSPFv2
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Configuring ospfd
+
+There is no @command{ospfd} specific options.  Common options can be
+specified (@pxref{Common Invocation Options}) to @command{ospfd}.
+@command{ospfd} needs interface information from @command{zebra}.  So
+please make it sure @command{zebra} is running before invoking
+@command{ospfd}.
+
+Like other daemons, @command{ospfd} configuration is done in OSPF
+specific configuration file @file{ospfd.conf}.
+
+@node OSPF router, OSPF area, Configuring ospfd, OSPFv2
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section OSPF router
+
+To start OSPF process you have to specify the OSPF router.  As of this
+writing, @command{ospfd} does not support multiple OSPF processes.
+
+@deffn Command {router ospf} {}
+@deffnx Command {no router ospf} {}
+Enable or disable the OSPF process.  @command{ospfd} does not yet
+support multiple OSPF processes.  So you can not specify an OSPF process
+number.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {ospf router-id @var{a.b.c.d}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no ospf router-id} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {ospf abr-type @var{type}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no ospf abr-type @var{type}} {}
+@var{type} can be cisco|ibm|shortcut|standard
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {ospf rfc1583compatibility} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no ospf rfc1583compatibility} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {passive interface @var{interface}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no passive interface @var{interface}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {timers spf <0-4294967295> <0-4294967295>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no timers spf} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {refresh group-limit <0-10000>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {refresh per-slice <0-10000>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {refresh age-diff <0-10000>} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {auto-cost refrence-bandwidth <1-4294967>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no auto-cost refrence-bandwidth} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {network @var{a.b.c.d/m} area @var{a.b.c.d}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {network @var{a.b.c.d/m} area @var{<0-4294967295>}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no network @var{a.b.c.d/m} area @var{a.b.c.d}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no network @var{a.b.c.d/m} area @var{<0-4294967295>}} {}
+This command specifies the OSPF enabled interface.  If the interface has
+an address of 10.0.0.1/8 then the command below provides network
+information to the ospf routers
+@example
+@group
+router ospf
+ network 10.0.0.0/8 area 0
+@end group
+@end example
+the network command's mask length should be the same as the interface
+address's mask.
+@end deffn
+
+@node OSPF area, OSPF interface, OSPF router, OSPFv2
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section OSPF area
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} range @var{a.b.c.d/m}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {area <0-4294967295> range @var{a.b.c.d/m}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area @var{a.b.c.d} range @var{a.b.c.d/m}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area <0-4294967295> range @var{a.b.c.d/m}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} range IPV4_PREFIX suppress} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area @var{a.b.c.d} range IPV4_PREFIX suppress} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} range IPV4_PREFIX substitute IPV4_PREFIX} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area @var{a.b.c.d} range IPV4_PREFIX substitute IPV4_PREFIX} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} virtual-link @var{a.b.c.d}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {area <0-4294967295> virtual-link @var{a.b.c.d}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area @var{a.b.c.d} virtual-link @var{a.b.c.d}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area <0-4294967295> virtual-link @var{a.b.c.d}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} shortcut} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {area <0-4294967295> shortcut} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area @var{a.b.c.d} shortcut} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area <0-4294967295> shortcut} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} stub} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {area <0-4294967295> stub} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area @var{a.b.c.d} stub} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area <0-4294967295> stub} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} stub no-summary} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {area <0-4294967295> stub no-summary} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area @var{a.b.c.d} stub no-summary} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area <0-4294967295> stub no-summary} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} default-cost <0-16777215>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area @var{a.b.c.d} default-cost <0-16777215>} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} export-list NAME} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {area <0-4294967295> export-list NAME} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area @var{a.b.c.d} export-list NAME} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area <0-4294967295> export-list NAME} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} import-list NAME} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {area <0-4294967295> import-list NAME} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area @var{a.b.c.d} import-list NAME} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area <0-4294967295> import-list NAME} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} authentication} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {area <0-4294967295> authentication} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area @var{a.b.c.d} authentication} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no area <0-4294967295> authentication} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {area @var{a.b.c.d} authentication message-digest} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {area <0-4294967295> authentication message-digest} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node OSPF interface, Redistribute routes to OSPF, OSPF area, OSPFv2
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section OSPF interface
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ip ospf authentication-key AUTH_KEY} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no ip ospf authentication-key} {}
+Set OSPF authentication key to a simple password.  After setting @var{AUTH_KEY},
+all OSPF packets are authenticated. @var{AUTH_KEY} has length up to 8 chars.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ip ospf message-digest-key KEYID md5 KEY} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no ip ospf message-digest-key} {}
+Set OSPF authentication key to a cryptographic password.  The cryptographic
+algorithm is MD5.  KEYID identifies secret key used to create the message
+digest.  KEY is the actual message digest key up to 16 chars.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ip ospf cost <1-65535>} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no ip ospf cost} {}
+Set link cost for the specified interface.  The cost value is set to router-LSA's
+metric field and used for SPF calculation.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ip ospf dead-interval <1-65535>} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no ip ospf dead-interval} {}
+Set number of seconds for RouterDeadInterval timer value used for Wait Timer
+and Inactivity Timer.  This value must be the same for all routers attached
+to a common network.  The default value is 40 seconds.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ip ospf hello-interval <1-65535>} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no ip ospf hello-interval} {}
+Set number of seconds for HelloInterval timer value.  Setting this value,
+Hello packet will be sent every timer value seconds on the specified interface.
+This value must be the same for all routers attached to a common network.
+The default value is 10 seconds.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ip ospf network (broadcast|non-broadcast|point-to-multipoint|point-to-point)} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no ip ospf network} {}
+Set explicitly network type for specifed interface.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ip ospf priority <0-255>} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no ip ospf priority} {}
+Set RouterPriority integer value.  Setting higher value, router will be more
+eligible to become Designated Router.  Setting the value to 0, router is no
+longer eligible to Designated Router.
+The default value is 1.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ip ospf retransmit-interval <1-65535>} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no ip ospf retransmit interval} {}
+Set number of seconds for RxmtInterval timer value.  This value is used
+when retransmitting Database Description and Link State Request packets.
+The default value is 5 seconds.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface Command} {ip ospf transmit-delay} {}
+@deffnx {Interface Command} {no ip ospf transmit-delay} {}
+Set number of seconds for InfTransDelay value.  LSAs' age should be 
+incremented by this value when transmitting.
+The default value is 1 seconds.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Redistribute routes to OSPF, Showing OSPF information, OSPF interface, OSPFv2
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Redistribute routes to OSPF
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {redistribute (kernel|connected|static|rip|bgp)} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {redistribute (kernel|connected|static|rip|bgp) @var{route-map}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {redistribute (kernel|connected|static|rip|bgp) metric-type (1|2)} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {redistribute (kernel|connected|static|rip|bgp) metric-type (1|2) route-map @var{word}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {redistribute (kernel|connected|static|rip|bgp) metric <0-16777214>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {redistribute (kernel|connected|static|rip|bgp) metric <0-16777214> route-map @var{word}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {redistribute (kernel|connected|static|rip|bgp) metric-type (1|2) metric <0-16777214>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {redistribute (kernel|connected|static|rip|bgp) metric-type (1|2) metric <0-16777214> route-map @var{word}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no redistribute (kernel|connected|static|rip|bgp)} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {default-information originate} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {default-information originate metric <0-16777214>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {default-information originate metric <0-16777214> metric-type (1|2)} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {default-information originate metric <0-16777214> metric-type (1|2) route-map @var{word}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {default-information originate always} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {default-information originate always metric <0-16777214>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {default-information originate always metric <0-16777214> metric-type (1|2)} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {default-information originate always metric <0-16777214> metric-type (1|2) route-map @var{word}} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no default-information originate} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {distribute-list NAME out (kernel|connected|static|rip|ospf} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no distribute-list NAME out (kernel|connected|static|rip|ospf} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {default-metric <0-16777214>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no default-metric} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {distance <1-255>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no distance <1-255>} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {OSPF Command} {distance ospf (intra-area|inter-area|external) <1-255>} {}
+@deffnx {OSPF Command} {no distance ospf} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {router zebra} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no router zebra} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Showing OSPF information, Debugging OSPF, Redistribute routes to OSPF, OSPFv2
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Showing OSPF information
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip ospf} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip ospf interface [INTERFACE]} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip ospf neighbor} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip ospf neighbor INTERFACE} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip ospf neighbor detail} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip ospf neighbor INTERFACE detail} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip ospf database} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip ospf database (asbr-summary|external|network|router|summary)} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip ospf database (asbr-summary|external|network|router|summary) @var{link-state-id}} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip ospf database (asbr-summary|external|network|router|summary) @var{link-state-id} adv-router @var{adv-router}} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip ospf database (asbr-summary|external|network|router|summary) adv-router @var{adv-router}} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip ospf database (asbr-summary|external|network|router|summary) @var{link-state-id} self-originate} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {show ip ospf database (asbr-summary|external|network|router|summary) self-originate} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip ospf database max-age} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip ospf database self-originate} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip ospf refresher} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show ip ospf route} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Debugging OSPF,  , Showing OSPF information, OSPFv2
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Debugging OSPF
+
+@deffn {Command} {debug ospf packet (hello|dd|ls-request|ls-update|ls-ack|all) (send|recv) [detail]} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no debug ospf packet (hello|dd|ls-request|ls-update|ls-ack|all) (send|recv) [detail]} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {debug ospf ism} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {debug ospf ism (status|events|timers)} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no debug ospf ism} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no debug ospf ism (status|events|timers)} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {debug ospf nsm} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {debug ospf nsm (status|events|timers)} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no debug ospf nsm} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no debug ospf nsm (status|events|timers)} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {debug ospf lsa} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {debug ospf lsa (generate|flooding|refresh)} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no debug ospf lsa} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no debug ospf lsa (generate|flooding|refresh)} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {debug ospf zebra} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {debug ospf zebra (interface|redistribute)} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no debug ospf zebra} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no debug ospf zebra (interface|redistribute)} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {show debugging ospf} {}
+@end deffn
+
diff --git a/doc/overview.texi b/doc/overview.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..68e6e39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/overview.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+@node Overview, Installation, Top, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Overview
+@cindex Overview
+
+  Zebra is a routing software package that provides TCP/IP based
+routing services with routing protocols support such as RIPv1, RIPv2,
+RIPng, OSPFv2, OSPFv3, BGP-4, and BGP-4+ (@pxref{Supported RFC}).
+Zebra also supports special BGP Route Reflector and Route Server
+behavior.  In addition to traditional IPv4 routing protocols, Zebra
+also supports IPv6 routing protocols.  With SNMP daemon which supports
+SMUX protocol, Zebra provides routing protocol MIBs (@pxref{SNMP
+Support}).
+
+  Zebra uses an advanced software architecture to provide you with a
+high quality, multi server routing engine.  Zebra has an interactive
+user interface for each routing protocol and supports common client
+commands.  Due to this design, you can add new protocol daemons to Zebra
+easily.  You can use Zebra library as your program's client user
+interface.
+
+  Zebra is an official @sc{gnu} software and distributed under the
+@sc{gnu} General Public License.
+
+@menu
+* About Zebra::                 Basic information about Zebra
+* System Architecture::         The Zebra system architecture
+* Supported Platforms::         Supported platforms and future plans
+* Supported RFC::               Supported RFCs
+* How to get Zebra::            
+* Mailing List::                Mailing list information
+* Bug Reports::                 Mail address for bug data
+@end menu
+
+@node About Zebra, System Architecture, Overview, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section About Zebra
+@cindex About Zebra
+
+  Today, TCP/IP networks are covering all of the world.  The Internet
+has been deployed in many countries, companies, and to the home.  When
+you connect to the Internet your packet will pass many routers which
+have TCP/IP routing functionality.
+
+  A system with Zebra installed acts as a dedicated router.  With Zebra,
+your machine exchanges routing information with other routers using
+routing protocols.  Zebra uses this information to update the kernel
+routing table so that the right data goes to the right place.  You can
+dynamically change the configuration and you may view routing table
+information from the Zebra terminal interface.
+
+  Adding to routing protocol support, Zebra can setup interface's flags,
+interface's address, static routes and so on.  If you have a small
+network, or a stub network, or xDSL connection, configuring the Zebra
+routing software is very easy.  The only thing you have to do is to set
+up the interfaces and put a few commands about static routes and/or
+default routes.  If the network is rather large, or if the network
+structure changes frequently, you will want to take advantage of Zebra's
+dynamic routing protocol support for protocols such as RIP, OSPF or BGP.
+Zebra is with you.
+
+  Traditionally, UNIX based router configuration is done by
+@command{ifconfig} and @command{route} commands.  Status of routing
+table is displayed by @command{netstat} utility.  Almost of these
+commands work only if the user has root privileges.  Zebra has a different
+system administration method.  There are two user modes in Zebra.  One is
+normal mode, the other is enable mode.  Normal mode user can only view
+system status, enable mode user can change system configuration.  This
+UNIX account independent feature will be great help to the router
+administrator.
+
+  Currently, Zebra supports common unicast routing protocols.  Multicast
+routing protocols such as BGMP, PIM-SM, PIM-DM will be supported in
+Zebra 2.0.  MPLS support is going on.  In the future, TCP/IP filtering
+control, QoS control, diffserv configuration will be added to Zebra.
+Zebra project's final goal is making a productive, quality free TCP/IP
+routing software.
+
+@node System Architecture, Supported Platforms, About Zebra, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section System Architecture
+@cindex System architecture
+@cindex Software architecture
+@cindex Software internals
+
+  Traditional routing software is made as a one process program which
+provides all of the routing protocol functionalities.  Zebra takes a
+different approach.  It is made from a collection of several daemons
+that work together to build the routing table.  There may be several
+protocol-specific routing daemons and zebra the kernel routing manager.
+
+  The @command{ripd} daemon handles the RIP protocol, while
+@command{ospfd} is a daemon which supports OSPF version 2.
+@command{bgpd} supports the BGP-4 protocol.  For changing the kernel
+routing table and for redistribution of routes between different routing
+protocols, there is a kernel routing table manager @command{zebra}
+daemon.  It is easy to add a new routing protocol daemons to the entire
+routing system without affecting any other software.  You need to run only
+the protocol daemon associated with routing protocols in use.  Thus,
+user may run a specific daemon and send routing reports to a central
+routing console.
+
+  There is no need for these daemons to be running on the same machine.
+You can even run several same protocol daemons on the same machine.  This
+architecture creates new possibilities for the routing system.
+
+@example
+@group
++----+  +----+  +-----+  +-----+
+|bgpd|  |ripd|  |ospfd|  |zebra|
++----+  +----+  +-----+  +-----+
+                            |
++---------------------------|--+
+|                           v  |
+|  UNIX Kernel  routing table  |
+|                              |
++------------------------------+
+
+    Zebra System Architecture
+@end group
+@end example
+
+  Multi-process architecture brings extensibility, modularity and
+maintainability.  At the same time it also brings many configuration
+files and terminal interfaces.  Each daemon has it's own configuration
+file and terminal interface.  When you configure a static route, it must
+be done in @command{zebra} configuration file.  When you configure BGP
+network it must be done in @command{bgpd} configuration file.  This can be a
+very annoying thing.  To resolve the problem, Zebra provides integrated
+user interface shell called @command{vtysh}.  @command{vtysh} connects to
+each daemon with UNIX domain socket and then works as a proxy for user input.
+
+  Zebra was planned to use multi-threaded mechanism when it runs with a
+kernel that supports multi-threads.  But at the moment, the thread
+library which comes with @sc{gnu}/Linux or FreeBSD has some problems with
+running reliable services such as routing software, so we don't use
+threads at all.  Instead we use the @command{select(2)} system call for
+multiplexing the events.
+
+  When @command{zebra} runs under a @sc{gnu} Hurd kernel it will act as a
+kernel routing table itself.  Under @sc{gnu} Hurd, all TCP/IP services are
+provided by user processes called @command{pfinet}.  Zebra will provide
+all the routing selection mechanisms for the process.  This feature will
+be implemented when @sc{gnu} Hurd becomes stable.
+
+@node Supported Platforms, Supported RFC, System Architecture, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Supported Platforms
+
+@cindex Supported platforms
+@cindex Zebra on other systems
+@cindex Compatibility with other systems
+@cindex Operating systems that support Zebra
+
+  Currently Zebra supports @sc{gnu}/Linux, BSD and Solaris.  Below is a list
+of OS versions on which Zebra runs.  Porting Zebra to other platforms is
+not so too difficult.  Platform dependent codes exist only in
+@command{zebra} daemon.  Protocol daemons are platform independent.
+Please let us know when you find out Zebra runs on a platform which is not
+listed below.
+
+@sp 1
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+GNU/Linux 2.0.37
+@item
+GNU/Linux 2.2.x
+@item
+GNU/Linux 2.3.x
+@item
+FreeBSD 2.2.8
+@item
+FreeBSD 3.x
+@item
+FreeBSD 4.x
+@item
+NetBSD 1.4
+@item
+OpenBSD 2.5
+@item
+Solaris 2.6
+@item
+Solaris 7
+@end itemize
+
+@sp 1
+  Some IPv6 stacks are in development.  Zebra supports following IPv6
+stacks.  For BSD, we recommend KAME IPv6 stack.  Solaris IPv6 stack is
+not yet supported.
+@sp 1
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+Linux IPv6 stack for GNU/Linux 2.2.x and higher.
+@item
+KAME IPv6 stack for BSD.
+@item
+INRIA IPv6 stack for BSD.
+@end itemize
+
+@node Supported RFC, How to get Zebra, Supported Platforms, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Supported RFC
+
+  Below is the list of currently supported RFC's.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @asis{RFC1058}
+@cite{Routing Information Protocol. C.L. Hedrick. Jun-01-1988.}
+
+@item @asis{RF2082}
+@cite{RIP-2 MD5 Authentication. F. Baker, R. Atkinson. January 1997.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC2453}
+@cite{RIP Version 2. G. Malkin. November 1998.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC2080}
+@cite{RIPng for IPv6. G. Malkin, R. Minnear. January 1997.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC2328}
+@cite{OSPF Version 2. J. Moy. April 1998.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC2740}
+@cite{OSPF for IPv6. R. Coltun, D. Ferguson, J. Moy. December 1999.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC1771} 
+@cite{A Border Gateway Protocol 4 (BGP-4). Y. Rekhter & T. Li. March 1995.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC1965}
+@cite{Autonomous System Confederations for BGP. P. Traina. June 1996.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC1997}
+@cite{BGP Communities Attribute. R. Chandra, P. Traina & T. Li. August 1996.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC2545}
+@cite{Use of BGP-4 Multiprotocol Extensions for IPv6 Inter-Domain Routing. P. Marques, F. Dupont. March 1999.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC2796}
+@cite{BGP Route Reflection An alternative to full mesh IBGP. T. Bates & R. Chandrasekeran. June 1996.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC2858}
+@cite{Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4. T. Bates, Y. Rekhter, R. Chandra, D. Katz. June 2000.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC2842}
+@cite{Capabilities Advertisement with BGP-4. R. Chandra, J. Scudder. May 2000.}
+
+@end table
+
+  When SNMP support is enabled, below RFC is also supported.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @asis{RFC1227}
+@cite{SNMP MUX protocol and MIB. M.T. Rose. May-01-1991.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC1657}
+@cite{Definitions of Managed Objects for the Fourth Version of the
+Border Gateway Protocol (BGP-4) using SMIv2. S. Willis, J. Burruss,
+J. Chu, Editor. July 1994.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC1724}
+@cite{RIP Version 2 MIB Extension. G. Malkin & F. Baker. November 1994.}
+
+@item @asis{RFC1850}
+@cite{OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base. F. Baker, R. Coltun.
+November 1995.}
+
+@end table
+
+@node How to get Zebra, Mailing List, Supported RFC, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section How to get Zebra
+
+  Zebra is still beta software and there is no officially
+released version.  So currently Zebra is distributed from Zebra beta ftp
+site located at:
+
+@url{ftp://ftp.zebra.org/pub/zebra}
+
+  Once Zebra is released you can get it from @sc{gnu} FTP site and
+its mirror sites.  We are planning Zebra-1.0 as the first released
+version.
+
+  Zebra's official web page is located at:
+
+@url{http://www.gnu.org/software/zebra/zebra.html}.
+
+  There is a Zebra beta tester web page at: 
+
+@url{http://www.zebra.org/}.
+
+  You can get the latest beta software information from this page.
+
+@node Mailing List, Bug Reports, How to get Zebra, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Mailing List
+@cindex How to get in touch with Zebra
+@cindex Mailing Zebra
+@cindex Contact information
+@cindex Mailing lists
+
+  There is a mailing list for discussions about Zebra.  If you have any
+comments or suggestions to Zebra, please send mail to
+@email{zebra@@zebra.org}.  New snapshot announcements, improvement
+notes, and patches are sent to the list.
+
+  To subscribe to the @email{zebra@@zebra.org, Zebra mailing list},
+please send a mail to @email{majordomo@@zebra.org} with a message body
+that includes only:
+
+@quotation
+subscribe zebra
+@end quotation
+
+  To unsubscribe from the list, please send a mail to
+@email{majordomo@@zebra.org} with a message body that includes only:
+
+@quotation
+unsubscribe zebra
+@end quotation
+
+@node Bug Reports,  , Mailing List, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Bug Reports
+
+@cindex Bug Reports
+@cindex Bug hunting
+@cindex Found a bug?
+@cindex Reporting bugs
+@cindex Reporting software errors
+@cindex Errors in the software
+
+  If you think you have found a bug, please send a bug report to
+@email{bug-zebra@@gnu.org}.  When you send a bug report, please be
+careful about the points below.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item 
+Please note what kind of OS you are using.  If you use the IPv6 stack
+please note that as well.
+@item
+Please show us the results of @code{netstat -rn} and @code{ifconfig -a}.
+Information from zebra's VTY command @code{show ip route} will also be
+helpful.
+@item
+Please send your configuration file with the report.  If you specify
+arguments to the configure script please note that too.
+@end itemize
+
+  Bug reports are very important for us to improve the quality of Zebra.
+Zebra is still in the development stage, but please don't hesitate to
+send a bug report to @email{bug-zebra@@gnu.org}.
+
diff --git a/doc/protocol.texi b/doc/protocol.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7cae9c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/protocol.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+@node  Zebra Protocol, Packet Binary Dump Format, SNMP Support, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@appendix Zebra Protocol
+
+Zebra Protocol is a protocol which is used between protocol daemon and
+zebra.  Each protocol daemon sends selected routes to zebra daemon.  Then
+zebra manages which route is installed into the forwarding table.
+
+Zebra Protocol is a TCP-based protocol.  Below is common header of Zebra
+Protocol.
+
+@example
+@group
+0                   1                   2                   3
+0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|           Length (2)          |   Command (1) |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+@end group
+@end example
+
+Length is total packet length including this header length.  So minimum
+length is three.  Command is Zebra Protocol command.
+
+@example
+ZEBRA_INTERFACE_ADD                1
+ZEBRA_INTERFACE_DELETE             2
+ZEBRA_INTERFACE_ADDRESS_ADD        3
+ZEBRA_INTERFACE_ADDRESS_DELETE     4
+ZEBRA_INTERFACE_UP                 5
+ZEBRA_INTERFACE_DOWN               6
+ZEBRA_IPV4_ROUTE_ADD               7
+ZEBRA_IPV4_ROUTE_DELETE            8
+ZEBRA_IPV6_ROUTE_ADD               9
+ZEBRA_IPV6_ROUTE_DELETE           10
+ZEBRA_REDISTRIBUTE_ADD            11
+ZEBRA_REDISTRIBUTE_DELETE         12
+ZEBRA_REDISTRIBUTE_DEFAULT_ADD    13
+ZEBRA_REDISTRIBUTE_DEFAULT_DELETE 14
+ZEBRA_IPV4_NEXTHOP_LOOKUP         15
+ZEBRA_IPV6_NEXTHOP_LOOKUP         16
+@end example
+
+@example
+@group
+0                   1                   2                   3
+0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+|             Type              |             Flags             |
++-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+@end group
+@end example
diff --git a/doc/ripd.8 b/doc/ripd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e15989f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/ripd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+.TH RIPD 8 "July 2000" "Zebra" "Version 0.88"
+
+.SH NAME
+ripd \- a RIP routing engine for use with Zebra
+
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ripd
+[
+.B \-dhrv
+]
+[
+.B \-f config-file
+]
+[
+.B \-i pid-file
+]
+[
+.B \-P port-number
+]
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B ripd 
+is a routing component that supports the 
+.B zebra
+route engine.
+.B ripd 
+supports RIPv1, RIPv2, and so forth.
+
+
+.SH OPTIONS
+
+.TP
+\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-daemon\fR
+Runs in daemon mode, forking and exiting from tty.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-config-file \fR\fIconfig-file\fR
+Specifies the config file to use for startup. If not specified this option will likely default to \fB\fI/usr/local/etc/ripd.conf\fR.
+ 
+.TP
+\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
+A brief message.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-pid_file \fR\fIpid-file\fR
+When ripd starts its process idenifier is written to
+\fB\fIpid-file\fR.  The init system uses the recorded PID to stop or
+restart ripd.  The likely default is \fB\fI/var/run/ripd.pid\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-P\fR, \fB\-\-vty_port \fR\fIport-number\fR 
+Specify the port that the ripd VTY will listen on. This defaults to
+2602, as specified in \fB\fI/etc/services\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-retain\fR 
+When the program terminates, retain routes added by \fBripd\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR
+Print the version and exit.
+
+
+.SH COMMANDS
+
+\fB router rip \fR
+\fB no router rip \fR
+
+\fB rip version [1|2] \fR
+\fB no rip version [1|2] \fR
+
+\fB network [A.B.C.D/M] \fR
+\fB no network [A.B.C.D/M] \fR
+
+\fB network [IFNAME] \fR
+\fB no network [IFNAME] \fR
+
+\fB neighbor [A.B.C.D] \fR
+\fB no neighbor [A.B.C.D] \fR
+
+\fB redistribute kernel \fR
+\fB redistribute kernel metric [METRIC]\fR
+\fB redistribute kernel route-map [ROUTE-MAP]\fR
+\fB no redistribute kernel \fR
+
+\fB redistribute static \fR
+\fB redistribute static metric [METRIC]\fR
+\fB redistribute static route-map [ROUTE-MAP]\fR
+\fB no redistribute static \fR
+
+\fB redistribute connected \fR
+\fB redistribute connected metric [METRIC]\fR
+\fB redistribute connected route-map [ROUTE-MAP]\fR
+\fB no redistribute connected \fR
+
+\fB redistribute ospf \fR
+\fB redistribute ospf metric [METRIC]\fR
+\fB redistribute ospf route-map [ROUTE-MAP]\fR
+\fB no redistribute ospf \fR
+
+\fB redistribute bgp \fR
+\fB redistribute bgp metric [METRIC]\fR
+\fB redistribute bgp route-map [ROUTE-MAP]\fR
+\fB no redistribute bgp \fR
+
+\fB route [A.B.C.D/M] \fR
+\fB no route [A.B.C.D/M] \fR
+
+\fB default-information originate \fR
+\fB no default-information originate \fR
+
+\fB default-metric [METRIC] \fR
+\fB no default-metric [METRIC] \fR
+
+\fB passive-interface [IFNAME] \fR
+\fB no passive-interface [IFNAME] \fR
+
+\fB offset-list [ACCESS-LIST] [in|out]\fR
+\fB offset-list [ACCESS-LIST] [in|out] [IFNAME]\fR
+\fB no offset-list [ACCESS-LIST] [in|out]\fR
+
+\fB timers basic [UPDATE-INTERVAL] [INVALID] [TIMEOUT] [GARBAGE-COLLECT] \fR
+\fB no timers basic \fR
+
+\fB distribute-list [ACCESS-LIST] [in|out] [IFNAME] \fR
+\fB no distribute-list [ACCESS-LIST] [in|out] [IFNAME] \fR
+
+\fB distribute-list prefix [PREFIX-LIST] [in|out] [IFNAME] \fR
+\fB no distribute-list prefix [PREFIX-LIST] [in|out] [IFNAME] \fR
+
+\fB distance [DISTANCE] \fR
+\fB no distance [DISTANCE] \fR
+
+\fB distance [DISTANCE] [A.B.C.D/M] \fR
+\fB no distance [DISTANCE] [A.B.C.D/M] \fR
+
+\fB distance [DISTANCE] [A.B.C.D/M] [ACCESS-LIST]\fR
+\fB no distance [DISTANCE] [A.B.C.D/M] [ACCESS-LIST]\fR
+
+\fB ip rip send version [VERSION] \fR
+\fB no ip rip send version [VERSION] \fR
+\fB ip rip receive version [VERSION] \fR
+\fB no ip rip receive version [VERSION] \fR
+
+\fB ip rip authentication mode [md5|text]\fR
+\fB no ip rip authentication mode [md5|text]\fR
+
+\fB ip rip authentication key-chain [KEY-CHAIN]\fR
+\fB no ip rip authentication key-chain [KEY-CHAIN]\fR
+
+\fB ip rip authentication string [STRING]\fR
+\fB no ip rip authentication string [STRING]\fR
+
+\fB ip spli-horizon\fR
+\fB no ip spli-horizon\fR
+
+\fB show ip rip \fR
+\fB show ip protocols \fR
+\fB show debugging rip \fR
+
+\fB debug rip \fR
+\fB debug rip events \fR
+\fB debug rip packet \fR
+\fB debug rip zebra \fR
+
+.SH FILES
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/sbin/ripd
+The default location of the 
+.B ripd
+binary.
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/etc/ripd.conf
+The default location of the 
+.B ripd
+config file.
+
+.TP
+.BI $(PWD)/ripd.log 
+If the 
+.B ripd
+process is config'd to output logs to a file, then you will find this
+file in the directory where you started \fBripd\fR.
+
+
+.SH WARNING
+This man page is intended as a quick reference for command line options, and for config file commands. The definitive document is the Info file \fBzebra\fR.
+
+
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+The ripd process may log to standard output, to a VTY, to a log file, or through syslog to the system logs. 
+.B ripd
+supports many debugging options, see the Info file, or the source for details.
+
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+References to other related man pages:
+
+ripngd(8), ospfd(8), ospf6d(8), bgpd(8), zebra(8)
+
+
+
+.SH BUGS
+.B ripd
+eats bugs for breakfast. If you have food for the maintainers try 
+.BI <bug-zebra@gnu.org>
+
+
+.SH AUTHOR[S]
+See <\fBwww.zebra.org\fR>, or the Info file for an accurate list of authors.
diff --git a/doc/ripd.texi b/doc/ripd.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d598ca6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/ripd.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,584 @@
+@c -*-texinfo-*-
+@c This is part of the GNU Zebra Manual.
+@c Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Kunihiro Ishiguro
+@c See file zebra.texi for copying conditions.
+@node RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter RIP
+
+RIP -- Routing Information Protocol is widely deployed interior gateway
+protocol.  RIP was developed in the 1970s at Xerox Labs as part of the
+XNS routing protocol.  RIP is a @dfn{distance-vector} protocol and is
+based on the @dfn{Bellman-Ford} algorithms.  As a distance-vector
+protocol, RIP router send updates to its neighbors periodically, thus
+allowing the convergence to a known topology.  In each update, the
+distance to any given network will be broadcasted to its neighboring
+router.
+
+@command{ripd} supports RIP version 2 as described in RFC2453 and RIP
+version 1 as described in RFC1058.
+
+@menu
+* Starting and Stopping ripd::  
+* RIP Configuration::           
+* How to Announce RIP route::   
+* Filtering RIP Routes::        
+* RIP Metric Manipulation::     
+* RIP distance::                
+* RIP route-map::               
+* RIP Authentication::          
+* RIP Timers::                  
+* Show RIP Information::        
+* RIP Debug Commands::          
+@end menu
+
+@node Starting and Stopping ripd, RIP Configuration, RIP, RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Starting and Stopping ripd
+
+The default configuration file name of @command{ripd}'s is
+@file{ripd.conf}.  When invocation @command{ripd} searches directory
+@value{INSTALL_PREFIX_ETC}.  If @file{ripd.conf} is not there next
+search current directory.
+
+RIP uses UDP port 521 to send and receive RIP packets.  So the user must have
+the capability to bind the port, generally this means that the user must
+have superuser privileges.  RIP protocol requires interface information
+maintained by @command{zebra} daemon.  So running @command{zebra}
+is mandatory to run @command{ripd}.  Thus minimum sequence for running
+RIP is like below:
+
+@example
+@group
+# zebra -d
+# ripd -d
+@end group
+@end example
+
+Please note that @command{zebra} must be invoked before @command{ripd}.
+
+To stop @command{ripd}.  Please use @command{kill `cat
+/var/run/ripd.pid`}.  Certain signals have special meaningss to @command{ripd}.
+
+@table @samp
+@item SIGHUP
+Reload configuration file @file{ripd.conf}.  All configurations are
+reseted.  All routes learned so far are cleared and removed from routing
+table.
+@item SIGUSR1
+Rotate @command{ripd} logfile.
+@item SIGINT
+@itemx SIGTERM
+@command{ripd} sweeps all installed RIP routes then terminates properly.
+@end table
+
+@command{ripd} invocation options.  Common options that can be specified
+(@pxref{Common Invocation Options}).
+
+@table @samp
+@item -r
+@itemx --retain
+When the program terminates, retain routes added by @command{ripd}.
+@end table
+
+@menu
+* RIP netmask::                 
+@end menu
+
+@node RIP netmask,  , Starting and Stopping ripd, Starting and Stopping ripd
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection RIP netmask
+
+The netmask features of @command{ripd} support both version 1 and version 2 of
+RIP.  Version 1 of RIP originally contained no netmask information.  In
+RIP version 1, network classes were originally used to determine the
+size of the netmask.  Class A networks use 8 bits of mask, Class B
+networks use 16 bits of masks, while Class C networks use 24 bits of
+mask.  Today, the most widely used method of a network mask is assigned
+to the packet on the basis of the interface that received the packet.
+Version 2 of RIP supports a variable length subnet mask (VLSM).  By
+extending the subnet mask, the mask can be divided and reused.  Each
+subnet can be used for different purposes such as large to middle size
+LANs and WAN links.  Zebra @command{ripd} does not support the non-sequential
+netmasks that are included in RIP Version 2.
+
+In a case of similar information with the same prefix and metric, the
+old information will be suppressed.  Ripd does not currently support
+equal cost multipath routing.
+
+
+@node RIP Configuration, How to Announce RIP route, Starting and Stopping ripd, RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section RIP Configuration
+
+@deffn Command {router rip} {}
+The @code{router rip} command is necessary to enable RIP.  To disable
+RIP, use the @code{no router rip} command.  RIP must be enabled before
+carrying out any of the RIP commands.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {no rouer rip} {}
+Disable RIP.
+@end deffn
+
+RIP can be configured to process either Version 1 or Version 2 packets,
+the default mode is Version 2.  If no version is specified, then the RIP
+daemon will default to Version 2.  If RIP is set to Version
+1, the setting "Version 1" will be displayed, but the setting "Version
+2" will not be displayed whether or not Version 2 is set explicitly as
+the version of RIP being used.
+
+@deffn {RIP Command} {network @var{network}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP Command} {no network @var{network}} {}
+Set the RIP enable interface by @var{network}.  The interfaces which
+have addresses matching with @var{network} are enabled.
+
+This group of commands either enables or disables RIP interfaces between
+certain numbers of a specified network address.  For example, if the
+network for 10.0.0.0/24 is RIP enabled, this would result in all the
+addresses from 10.0.0.0 to 10.0.0.255 being enabled for RIP.  The @code{no
+network} command will disable RIP for the specified network.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIP Command} {network @var{ifname}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP Command} {no network @var{ifname}} {}
+Set a RIP enabled interface by @var{ifname}.  Both the sending and
+receiving of RIP packets will be enabled on the port specified in the
+@code{network ifname} command.  The @code{no network ifname} command will disable
+RIP on the specified interface.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIP Command} {neighbor @var{a.b.c.d}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP Command} {no neighbor @var{a.b.c.d}} {}
+Specify RIP neighbor.  When a neighbor doesn't understand multicast,
+this command is used to specify neighbors.  In some cases, not all
+routers will be able to understand multicasting, where packets are sent
+to a network or a group of addresses.  In a situation where a neighbor
+cannot process multicast packets, it is necessary to establish a direct
+link between routers.  The neighbor command allows the network
+administrator to specify a router as a RIP neighbor.  The @code{no
+neighbor a.b.c.d} command will disable the RIP neighbor.
+@end deffn
+
+Below is very simple RIP configuration.  Interface @code{eth0} and
+interface which address match to @code{10.0.0.0/8} are RIP enabled.
+
+@example
+@group
+!
+router rip
+ network 10.0.0.0/8
+ network eth0
+!
+@end group
+@end example
+
+Passive interface
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {passive-interface @var{IFNAME}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {no passive-interface @var{IFNAME}} {}
+This command sets the specified interface to passive mode.  On passive mode
+interface, all receiving packets are processed as normal and ripd does
+not send either multicast or unicast RIP packets except to RIP neighbors
+specified with @code{neighbor} command.
+@end deffn
+
+RIP version handling
+
+@deffn {RIP Command} {version @var{version}} {}
+Set RIP process's version.  @var{version} can be ``1'' or ``2''.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface command} {ip rip send version @var{version}} {}
+@var{version} can be `1', `2', `1 2'.  This configuration command
+overrides the router's rip version setting.  The command will enable the
+selected interface to send packets with RIP Version 1, RIP Version 2, or
+both.  In the case of '1 2', packets will be both broadcast and
+multicast.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface command} {ip rip receive version @var{version}} {}
+Version setting for incoming RIP packets.  This command will enable the
+selected interface to receive packets in RIP Version 1, RIP Version 2,
+or both.
+@end deffn
+
+RIP split-horizon
+
+@deffn {Interface command} {ip split-horizon} {}
+@deffnx {Interface command} {no ip split-horizon} {}
+Control split-horizon on the interface.  Default is @code{ip
+split-horizon}.  If you don't perform split-horizon on the interface,
+please specify @code{no ip split-horizon}.
+@end deffn
+
+@node How to Announce RIP route, Filtering RIP Routes, RIP Configuration, RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section How to Announce RIP route
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {redistribute kernel} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {redistribute kernel metric <0-16>} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {redistribute kernel route-map @var{route-map}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {no redistribute kernel} {}
+@code{redistribute kernel} redistributes routing information from
+kernel route entries into the RIP tables. @code{no redistribute kernel}
+disables the routes.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {redistribute static} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {redistribute static metric <0-16>} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {redistribute static route-map @var{route-map}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {no redistribute static} {}
+@code{redistribute static} redistributes routing information from
+static route entries into the RIP tables. @code{no redistribute static}
+disables the routes.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {redistribute connected} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {redistribute connected metric <0-16>} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {redistribute connected route-map @var{route-map}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {no redistribute connected} {}
+Redistribute connected routes into the RIP tables.  @code{no
+redistribute connected} disables the connected routes in the RIP tables.
+This command redistribute connected of the interface which RIP disabled.
+The connected route on RIP enabled interface is announced by default.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {redistribute ospf} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {redistribute ospf metric <0-16>} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {redistribute ospf route-map @var{route-map}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {no redistribute ospf} {}
+@code{redistribute ospf} redistributes routing information from
+ospf route entries into the RIP tables. @code{no redistribute ospf}
+disables the routes.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {redistribute bgp} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {redistribute bgp metric <0-16>} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {redistribute bgp route-map @var{route-map}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {no redistribute bgp} {}
+@code{redistribute bgp} redistributes routing information from
+bgp route entries into the RIP tables. @code{no redistribute bgp}
+disables the routes.
+@end deffn
+
+If you want to specify RIP only static routes:
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {default-information originate} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {route @var{a.b.c.d/m}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {no route @var{a.b.c.d/m}} {}
+This command is specific to Zebra.  The @code{route} command makes a static
+route only inside RIP. This command should be used only by advanced
+users who are particularly knowledgeable about the RIP protocol.  In
+most cases, we recommend creating a static route in Zebra and
+redistributing it in RIP using @code{redistribute static}.
+@end deffn
+
+
+@node  Filtering RIP Routes, RIP Metric Manipulation, How to Announce RIP route, RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Filtering RIP Routes
+
+RIP routes can be filtered by a distribute-list.
+
+@deffn Command {distribute-list @var{access_list} @var{direct} @var{ifname}} {}
+You can apply access lists to the interface with a @code{distribute-list}
+command.  @var{access_list} is the access list name.  @var{direct} is
+@samp{in} or @samp{out}.  If @var{direct} is @samp{in} the access list
+is applied to input packets.
+
+The @code{distribute-list} command can be used to filter the RIP path.
+@code{distribute-list} can apply access-lists to a chosen interface.
+First, one should specify the access-list.  Next, the name of the
+access-list is used in the distribute-list command.  For example, in the
+following configuration @samp{eth0} will permit only the paths that
+match the route 10.0.0.0/8
+
+@example
+@group
+!
+router rip
+ distribute-list private in eth0
+!
+access-list private permit 10 10.0.0.0/8
+access-list private deny any
+!
+@end group
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@code{distribute-list} can be applied to both incoming and outgoing data.
+
+@deffn Command {distribute-list prefix @var{prefix_list} (in|out) @var{ifname}} {}
+You can apply prefix lists to the interface with a
+@code{distribute-list} command.  @var{prefix_list} is the prefix list
+name.  Next is the direction of @samp{in} or @samp{out}.  If
+@var{direct} is @samp{in} the access list is applied to input packets.
+@end deffn
+
+@node RIP Metric Manipulation, RIP distance, Filtering RIP Routes, RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section RIP Metric Manipulation
+
+RIP metric is a value for distance for the network.  Usually
+@command{ripd} increment the metric when the network information is
+received.  Redistributed routes' metric is set to 1.
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {default-metric <1-16>} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {no default-metric <1-16>} {}
+This command modifies the default metric value for redistributed routes.  The
+default value is 1.  This command does not affect connected route
+even if it is redistributed by @command{redistribute connected}.  To modify
+connected route's metric value, please use @command{redistribute
+connected metric} or @command{route-map}.  @command{offset-list} also
+affects connected routes.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {offset-list @var{access-list} (in|out)} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {offset-list @var{access-list} (in|out) @var{ifname}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node RIP distance, RIP route-map, RIP Metric Manipulation, RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section RIP distance
+
+Distance value is used in zebra daemon.  Default RIP distance is 120.
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {distance <1-255>} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {no distance <1-255>} {}
+Set default RIP distance to specified value.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {distance <1-255> @var{A.B.C.D/M}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {no distance <1-255> @var{A.B.C.D/M}} {}
+Set default RIP distance to specified value when the route's source IP
+address matches the specified prefix.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {distance <1-255> @var{A.B.C.D/M} @var{access-list}} {}
+@deffnx {RIP command} {no distance <1-255> @var{A.B.C.D/M} @var{access-list}} {}
+Set default RIP distance to specified value when the route's source IP
+address matches the specified prefix and the specified access-list.
+@end deffn
+
+@node RIP route-map, RIP Authentication, RIP distance, RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section RIP route-map
+
+Usage of @command{ripd}'s route-map support.
+
+Optional argument route-map MAP_NAME can be added to each @code{redistribute}
+statement.
+
+@example
+redistribute static [route-map MAP_NAME]
+redistribute connected [route-map MAP_NAME]
+.....
+@end example
+
+Cisco applies route-map _before_ routes will exported to rip route
+table.  In current Zebra's test implementation, @command{ripd} applies route-map
+after routes are listed in the route table and before routes will be announced
+to an interface (something like output filter). I think it is not so clear,
+but it is draft and it may be changed at future.
+
+Route-map statement (@pxref{Route Map}) is needed to use route-map
+functionality.
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {match interface @var{word}} {}
+This command match to incoming interface.  Notation of this match is
+different from Cisco. Cisco uses a list of interfaces - NAME1 NAME2
+... NAMEN.  Ripd allows only one name (maybe will change in the
+future).  Next - Cisco means interface which includes next-hop of
+routes (it is somewhat similar to "ip next-hop" statement).  Ripd
+means interface where this route will be sent. This difference is
+because "next-hop" of same routes which sends to different interfaces
+must be different. Maybe it'd be better to made new matches - say
+"match interface-out NAME" or something like that.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {match ip address @var{word}} {}
+@deffnx {Route Map} {match ip address prefix-list @var{word}} {}
+Match if route destination is permitted by access-list.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {match ip next-hop A.B.C.D} {}
+Cisco uses here <access-list>, @command{ripd} IPv4 address. Match if
+route has this next-hop (meaning next-hop listed in the rip route
+table - "show ip rip")
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {match metric <0-4294967295>} {}
+This command match to the metric value of RIP updates.  For other
+protocol compatibility metric range is shown as <0-4294967295>.  But
+for RIP protocol only the value range <0-16> make sense.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {set ip next-hop A.B.C.D} {}
+This command set next hop value in RIPv2 protocol.  This command does
+not affect RIPv1 because there is no next hop field in the packet.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route Map} {set metric <0-4294967295>} {}
+Set a metric for matched route when sending announcement.  The metric
+value range is very large for compatibility with other protocols.  For
+RIP, valid metric values are from 1 to 16.
+@end deffn
+
+@node RIP Authentication, RIP Timers, RIP route-map, RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section RIP Authentication
+
+@deffn {Interface command} {ip rip authentication mode md5} {}
+@deffnx {Interface command} {no ip rip authentication mode md5} {}
+Set the interface with RIPv2 MD5 authentication.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface command} {ip rip authentication mode text} {}
+@deffnx {Interface command} {no ip rip authentication mode text} {}
+Set the interface with RIPv2 simple password authentication.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface command} {ip rip authentication string @var{string}} {}
+@deffnx {Interface command} {no ip rip authentication string @var{string}} {}
+RIP version 2 has simple text authentication.  This command sets
+authentication string.  The string must be shorter than 16 characters.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Interface command} {ip rip authentication key-chain @var{key-chain}} {}
+@deffnx {Interface command} {no ip rip authentication key-chain @var{key-chain}} {}
+Specifiy Keyed MD5 chain.
+@end deffn
+
+@example
+!
+key chain test
+ key 1
+  key-string test
+!
+interface eth1
+ ip rip authentication mode md5
+ ip rip authentication key-chain test
+!
+@end example
+
+@node RIP Timers, Show RIP Information, RIP Authentication, RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section RIP Timers
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {timers basic @var{update} @var{timeout} @var{garbage}} {}
+
+RIP protocol has several timers.  User can configure those timers' values
+by @code{timers basic} command.
+
+The default settings for the timers are as follows: 
+
+@itemize @bullet 
+@item
+The update timer is 30 seconds. Every update timer seconds, the RIP
+process is awakened to send an unsolicited Response message containing
+the complete routing table to all neighboring RIP routers.
+
+@item
+The timeout timer is 180 seconds. Upon expiration of the timeout, the
+route is no longer valid; however, it is retained in the routing table
+for a short time so that neighbors can be notified that the route has
+been dropped.
+
+@item
+The garbage collect timer is 120 seconds.  Upon expiration of the
+garbage-collection timer, the route is finally removed from the routing
+table.
+
+@end itemize
+
+The @code{timers basic} command allows the the default values of the timers
+listed above to be changed.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIP command} {no timers basic} {}
+The @code{no timers basic} command will reset the timers to the default
+settings listed above.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Show RIP Information, RIP Debug Commands, RIP Timers, RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Show RIP Information
+
+To display RIP routes.
+
+@deffn Command {show ip rip} {}
+Show RIP routes.
+@end deffn
+
+The command displays all RIP routes. For routes that are received
+through RIP, this command will display the time the packet was sent and
+the tag information.  This command will also display this information
+for routes redistributed into RIP.
+
+@c Exmaple here.
+
+@deffn Command {show ip protocols} {}
+The command displays current RIP status.  It includes RIP timer,
+filtering, version, RIP enabled interface and RIP peer inforation.
+@end deffn
+
+@example
+@group
+ripd> @b{show ip protocols}
+Routing Protocol is "rip"
+  Sending updates every 30 seconds with +/-50%, next due in 35 seconds
+  Timeout after 180 seconds, garbage collect after 120 seconds
+  Outgoing update filter list for all interface is not set
+  Incoming update filter list for all interface is not set
+  Default redistribution metric is 1
+  Redistributing: kernel connected
+  Default version control: send version 2, receive version 2 
+    Interface        Send  Recv
+  Routing for Networks:
+    eth0
+    eth1
+    1.1.1.1
+    203.181.89.241
+  Routing Information Sources:
+    Gateway          BadPackets BadRoutes  Distance Last Update
+@end group
+@end example
+
+@node RIP Debug Commands,  , Show RIP Information, RIP
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section RIP Debug Commands
+
+Debug for RIP protocol.
+
+@deffn Command {debug rip events} {}
+Debug rip events.
+@end deffn
+
+@code{debug rip} will show RIP events.  Sending and receiving
+packets, timers, and changes in interfaces are events shown with @command{ripd}.
+
+@deffn Command {debug rip packet} {}
+Debug rip packet.
+@end deffn
+
+@code{debug rip packet} will display detailed information about the RIP
+packets.  The origin and port number of the packet as well as a packet
+dump is shown.
+
+@deffn Command {debug rip zebra} {}
+Debug rip between zebra communication.
+@end deffn
+
+This command will show the communication between @command{ripd} and @command{zebra}.  The
+main information will include addition and deletion of paths to the
+kernel and the sending and receiving of interface information.
+
+@deffn Command {show debugging rip} {}
+Display @command{ripd}'s debugging option.
+@end deffn
+
+@code{show debugging rip} will show all information currently set for ripd
+debug.
diff --git a/doc/ripngd.8 b/doc/ripngd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cff8abe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/ripngd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+.TH RIPNGD 8 "July 2000" "Zebra Beast - RIPNGD" "Version 0.88"
+
+.SH NAME
+ripngd \- a RIP routing engine for use with Zebra and IPv6
+
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ripngd
+[
+.B \-dhlrv
+]
+[
+.B \-f config-file
+]
+[
+.B \-i pid-file
+]
+[
+.B \-P port-number
+]
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B ripngd 
+is a routing component that works with the 
+.B zebra
+routing engine.
+
+
+
+.SH OPTIONS
+
+.TP
+\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-daemon\fR
+Runs in daemon mode, forking and exiting from tty.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-config-file \fR\fIconfig-file\fR 
+Specifies the config file to use for startup. If not specified this
+option will likely default to \fB\fI/usr/local/etc/ripngd.conf\fR.
+ 
+.TP
+\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
+A brief message.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-pid_file \fR\fIpid-file\fR
+When ripngd starts its process idenifier is written to
+\fB\fIpid-file\fR.  The init system uses the recorded PID to stop or
+restart ripngd.  The likely default is \fB\fI/var/run/ripngd.pid\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-log_mode\fR 
+Turn verbose logging on.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-P\fR, \fB\-\-vty_port \fR\fIport-number\fR 
+Specify the port that the ripngd VTY will listen on. This defaults to
+2603, as specified in \fB\fI/etc/services\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-retain\fR 
+When the program terminates, retain routes added by \fBripd\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR
+Print the version and exit.
+
+
+.SH COMMANDS
+
+\fB router ripng \fR
+\fB router zebra \fR -- (Move routes into kernel table)
+
+\fB network [NETWORK] \fR
+\fB no network [NETWORK] \fR
+
+\fB network [IFNAME] \fR
+\fB no network [IFNAME] \fR
+
+\fB route [NETWORK] \fR
+\fB no route [NETWORK] \fR
+
+\fB flush_timer [FLUSH] \fR
+
+\fB distribute-list [ACCESS-LIST] [in|out] [IFNAME] \fR
+
+\fB show ip ripng \fR
+\fB show debugging ripng \fR
+
+\fB debug ripng \fR
+\fB debug ripng events \fR
+\fB debug ripng packet \fR
+\fB debug ripng zebra \fR
+
+
+
+.SH FILES
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/sbin/ripngd
+The default location of the 
+.B ripngd
+binary.
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/etc/ripngd.conf
+The default location of the 
+.B ripngd
+config file.
+
+.TP
+.BI $(PWD)/ripngd.log 
+If the 
+.B ripngd
+process is config'd to output logs to a file, then you will find this
+file in the directory where you started \fBripngd\fR.
+
+
+.SH WARNING
+This man page is intended as a quick reference for command line
+options, and for config file commands. The definitive document is the
+Info file \fBzebra\fR.
+
+
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+The ripngd process may log to standard output, to a VTY, to a log
+file, or through syslog to the system logs. \fBripngd\fR supports many
+debugging options, see the Info file, or the source for details.
+
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+References to other related man pages:
+
+ripd(8), ospfd(8), ospf6d(8), bgpd(8), zebra(8), vtysh(1)
+
+.SH BUGS
+.B ripngd
+eats bugs for breakfast. If you have food for the maintainers try 
+.BI <bug-zebra@gnu.org>
+
+
+.SH AUTHOR[S]
+See <\fBwww.zebra.org\fR>, or the Info file for an accurate list of authors.
+
diff --git a/doc/ripngd.texi b/doc/ripngd.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b49f0bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/ripngd.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+@node RIPng, OSPFv2, RIP, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter RIPng
+
+@command{ripngd} supports the RIPng protocol as described in RFC2080.  It's an
+IPv6 reincarnation of the RIP protocol.
+
+@menu
+* Invoking ripngd::             
+* ripngd Configuration::        
+* ripngd Terminal Mode Commands::  
+* ripngd Filtering Commands::   
+@end menu
+
+@node Invoking ripngd, ripngd Configuration, RIPng, RIPng
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Invoking ripngd
+
+There are no @code{ripngd} specific invocation options.  Common options
+can be specified (@pxref{Common Invocation Options}).
+
+@node ripngd Configuration, ripngd Terminal Mode Commands, Invoking ripngd, RIPng
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section ripngd Configuration
+
+Currently ripngd supports the following commands:
+
+@deffn Command {router ripng} {}
+Enable RIPng.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIPng Command} {flush_timer @var{time}} {}
+Set flush timer.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIPng Command} {network @var{network}} {}
+Set RIPng enabled interface by @var{network}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIPng Command} {network @var{ifname}} {}
+Set RIPng enabled interface by @var{ifname}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {RIPng Command} {route @var{network}} {}
+Set RIPng static routing announcement of @var{network}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {router zebra} {}
+This command is the default and does not appear in the configuration.
+With this statement, RIPng routes go to the @command{zebra} daemon.
+@end deffn
+
+@node ripngd Terminal Mode Commands, ripngd Filtering Commands, ripngd Configuration, RIPng
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section ripngd Terminal Mode Commands
+
+@deffn Command {show ip ripng} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {show debugging ripng} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {debug ripng events} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {debug ripng packet} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn Command {debug ripng zebra} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node ripngd Filtering Commands,  , ripngd Terminal Mode Commands, RIPng
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section ripngd Filtering Commands
+
+@deffn Command {distribute-list @var{access_list} (in|out) @var{ifname}} {}
+You can apply an access-list to the interface using the
+@code{distribute-list} command.  @var{access_list} is an access-list
+name.  @var{direct} is @samp{in} or @samp{out}.  If @var{direct} is
+@samp{in}, the access-list is applied only to incoming packets.
+
+@example
+distribute-list local-only out sit1
+@end example
+@end deffn
diff --git a/doc/routemap.texi b/doc/routemap.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..478f462
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/routemap.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+@node Route Map, IPv6 Support, Filtering, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Route Map
+
+Route map is a very useful function in zebra.  There is a match and set
+statement permitted in a route map.
+
+@example
+@group
+route-map test permit 10
+ match ip address 10
+ set local-preference 200
+@end group
+@end example
+
+This means that if a route matches ip access-list number 10 it's
+local-preference value is set to 200.
+
+@menu
+* Route Map Command::           
+* Route Map Match Command::     
+* Route Map Set Command::       
+@end menu
+
+@node Route Map Command, Route Map Match Command, Route Map, Route Map
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Route Map Command
+
+@deffn {Command} {route-map @var{route-map-name} permit @var{priority}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Route Map Match Command, Route Map Set Command, Route Map Command, Route Map
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Route Map Match Command
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {match ip address @var{access_list}} {}
+Matches the specified @var{access_list}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {match ip next-hop @var{ipv4_addr}} {}
+Matches the specified @var{ipv4_addr}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {match aspath @var{as_path}} {}
+Matches the specified @var{as_path}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {match metric @var{metric}} {}
+Matches the specified @var{metric}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {match community @var{community_list}} {}
+Matches the specified  @var{community_list}
+@end deffn
+
+@node Route Map Set Command,  , Route Map Match Command, Route Map
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Route Map Set Command
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {set ip next-hop @var{ipv4_address}} {}
+Set the BGP nexthop address.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {set local-preference @var{local_pref}} {}
+Set the BGP local preference.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {set weight @var{weight}} {}
+Set the route's weight.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {set metric @var{metric}} {}
+Set the BGP attribute MED.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {set as-path prepend @var{as_path}} {}
+Set the BGP AS path to prepend.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {set community @var{community}} {}
+Set the BGP community attribute.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {set ipv6 next-hop global @var{ipv6_address}} {}
+Set the BGP-4+ global IPv6 nexthop address.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Route-map Command} {set ipv6 next-hop local @var{ipv6_address}} {}
+Set the BGP-4+ link local IPv6 nexthop address.
+@end deffn
+
diff --git a/doc/snmp.texi b/doc/snmp.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..315c91c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/snmp.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+@node SNMP Support, Zebra Protocol, Kernel Interface, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter SNMP Support
+
+SNMP (Simple Network Managing Protocol) is widely implemented feature
+for collecting network information from router and/or host.  Zebra
+itself does not support SNMP agent functionality.  But conjuction with
+SNMP agent, Zebra provides routing protocol MIBs.
+
+Zebra uses SMUX protocol (RFC1227) for making communication with SNMP
+agent.  There are several SNMP agent which support SMUX.  We recommend
+to use the latest @command{ucd-snmp} software.  
+
+@menu
+* How to get ucd-snmp::         
+* SMUX configuration::          
+@end menu
+
+@node How to get ucd-snmp, SMUX configuration, SNMP Support, SNMP Support
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section How to get ucd-snmp
+
+ucd-snmp is a free software which distributed so called "as is" software
+license.  Please check the license which comes with distribution of
+@command{ucd-snmp}.  The authors of ucd-snmp are the University of
+California, the University of California at Davis, and the Electrical
+Engineering department at the University of California at Davis.
+
+You can get ucd-snmp from @url{ftp://ucd-snmp.ucdavis.edu/}.  As of this
+writing we are testing with @command{ucd-snmp-4.1.pre1.tar.gz}.
+
+To enable SMUX protocol support, please configure @command{ucd-snmp}
+like below.
+
+@example
+% configure --with-mib-modules=smux
+@end example
+
+After compile and install @command{ucd-snmp}, you will need to configure
+smuxpeer.  I'm now using configuration shown below.  This means SMUX client
+connects to MIB 1.3.6.1.6.3.1 with password test.
+  
+@example
+/usr/local/share/snmp/snmpd.conf
+================================
+smuxpeer 1.3.6.1.6.3.1 test
+@end example
+
+@node SMUX configuration,  , How to get ucd-snmp, SNMP Support
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section SMUX configuration
+
+To enable SNMP support of Zebra, you have to configure Zebra with
+@command{--enable-snmp} (@pxref{Configure the Software}).
+
+@deffn {Command} {smux peer @var{oid}} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no smux peer @var{oid}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Command} {smux peer @var{oid} @var{password}} {}
+@deffnx {Command} {no smux peer @var{oid} @var{password}} {}
+@end deffn
+
+@example
+!
+smux peer .1.3.6.1.6.3.1 test
+!
+@end example
diff --git a/doc/texinfo.tex b/doc/texinfo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..332e392
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/texinfo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,5625 @@
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+%
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+%
+\def\texinfoversion{1999-02-14.16}%
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99
+% Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
+% your option) any later version.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+% General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
+% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+%
+% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
+% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
+% what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+%
+% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
+% reports; you can get the latest version from:
+%   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/texinfo.tex
+%   (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
+%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
+%   ftp://ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex
+%   (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@ctan.org for a list).
+%   /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
+% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+% There is a small home page for Texinfo at http://texinfo.org/.
+%
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
+% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
+% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
+%
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
+% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   texindex foo.??
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file; this makes foo.ps.
+% The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct.
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+%
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages.  You can get
+% the existing language-specific files from ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/.
+
+\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+
+% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptext=\t
+
+% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined	\gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined	\gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
+\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined	\gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
+\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined	\gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined	\gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined	\gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefivar\undefined	\gdef\putwordDefivar{Instance Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined	\gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined	\gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined	\gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
+\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
+\hyphenation{eshell}
+\hyphenation{white-space}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen \bindingoffset
+\newdimen \normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
+   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+\else
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
+   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+   \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
+   \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
+   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+\fi
+
+% For @cropmarks command.
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+%
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Main output routine.
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\headlinebox
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+  %
+  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+  %
+  {%
+    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+    % before the \shipout runs.
+    %
+    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
+    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
+    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+    \shipout\vbox{%
+      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+        \hsize = \outerhsize
+        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
+        \vtop to0pt{%
+          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+          }%
+          \vss}%
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin
+        \line\bgroup
+          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+          \vbox\bgroup
+      \fi
+      %
+      \unvbox\headlinebox
+      \pagebody{#1}%
+      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
+        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+        \vskip 2\baselineskip
+        \unvbox\footlinebox
+      \fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks
+          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+        \vbox to0pt{\vss
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+          }%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+        }%
+      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+      \fi
+    }% end of \shipout\vbox
+  }% end of group with \turnoffactive
+  \advancepageno
+  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg#1{%
+  \let\next = #1%
+  \begingroup
+    \obeylines
+    \futurelet\temp\parseargx
+}
+
+% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
+% the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
+\def\parseargx{%
+  % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
+  \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
+    \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
+  \else
+    \expandafter\parseargline
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
+{\obeyspaces %
+ \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
+
+{\obeylines %
+  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+    %
+    % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
+    % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
+    \argremovec #1\c\relax %
+    \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
+    %
+    % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
+    \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+  }%
+}
+
+% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
+% do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
+% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
+% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+
+% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+%    @end itemize  @c foo
+% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
+% `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
+% result to \toks0.
+%
+% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
+% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
+% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
+% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
+% here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
+% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
+% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
+%
+\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \ignoreactivespaces
+    \edef\temp{#1}%
+    \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+%
+\begingroup
+  \obeyspaces
+  \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
+%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
+\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
+\def\ENVcheck{%
+\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
+\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+
+% @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
+
+\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+
+\def\beginxxx #1{%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
+\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+%
+\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
+\def\endxxx #1{%
+  \removeactivespaces{#1}%
+  \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
+  %
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
+      % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
+      \errhelp = \EMsimple
+      \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
+    \else
+      \unmatchedenderror\endthing
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
+    \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
+%
+\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+  \errhelp = \EMsimple
+  \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+}
+
+% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
+%
+\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
+% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
+\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
+\def\singlespace{%
+  % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
+  % environments.  --karl, 6may93
+  %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
+  %\kern \baselineskip}%
+  \setleading \singlespaceskip
+}
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\`{{`}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+\begingroup
+  % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
+  \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
+  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+  \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
+  @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
+  @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
+@endgroup
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
+\let\, = \c
+\let\dotaccent = \.
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \t
+\let\ubaraccent = \b
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
+  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
+  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode`@ = 11
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+\def\group{\begingroup
+  \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
+  % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
+  % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
+  % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+  % above.  But it's pretty close.
+  \def\Egroup{%
+    \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+    \endgroup         % End the \group.
+  }%
+  %
+  \vtop\bgroup
+    % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
+    % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
+    % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
+    % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
+    % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
+    \everypar = {\strut}%
+    %
+    % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
+    % normal interline spacing.
+    \offinterlineskip
+    %
+    % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
+    % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
+    % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
+    % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
+    % empty paragraph.
+    \ifx\par\lisppar
+      \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
+      %
+      % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
+      \obeylines
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
+    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
+    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+    \comment
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
+
+\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\def\needx #1{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\def\needx#1{%
+  % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+  % paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page
+  % break, since the best break might be right here.
+  \allowbreak
+  \nointerlineskip
+  \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}%
+  %
+  % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+  % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
+  % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+  % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+  % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
+  %
+  % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+  % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+  % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+  % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+  % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
+  % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+  % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+  \penalty9999
+  %
+  % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+  \kern -#1\mil
+  %
+  % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% @br   forces paragraph break
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 1.5em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 2em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+  \spacefactor=3000
+}
+
+
+% @page    forces the start of a new page
+%
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
+\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
+\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
+
+\def\inmargin#1{%
+\strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
+  \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
+  \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+
+%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
+% Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\include{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\\=12
+  \catcode`~=12
+  \catcode`^=12
+  \catcode`_=12
+  \catcode`|=12
+  \catcode`<=12
+  \catcode`>=12
+  \catcode`+=12
+  \parsearg\includezzz}
+% Restore active chars for included file.
+\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
+  % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+  \def\thisfile{#1}%
+  \input\thisfile
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line   outputs that line, centered
+
+\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
+\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+\centerline{#1}}}
+
+% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
+\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
+\commentxxx}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% @paragraphindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
+% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+% 
+\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
+\def\noneword{none}
+%
+\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
+\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\asisword
+  \else
+    \ifx\temp\noneword
+      \defaultparindent = 0pt
+    \else
+      \defaultparindent = #1em
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+}
+
+% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math means output in math mode.
+% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
+% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written.  Then,
+% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
+% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo).  So we must use a
+% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
+%
+% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
+% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
+%
+\let\implicitmath = $
+\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
+
+% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
+\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
+\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
+%
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+   \iflinks
+     \readauxfile
+   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
+   \openindices
+   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+   \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+   %
+   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+   % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
+   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+   \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
+   \closein1
+   \temp
+   %
+   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+% Called from \setfilename.
+%
+\def\openindices{%
+  \newindex{cp}%
+  \newcodeindex{fn}%
+  \newcodeindex{vr}%
+  \newcodeindex{tp}%
+  \newcodeindex{ky}%
+  \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+
+\message{fonts,}
+% Font-change commands.
+
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+% We don't need math for this one.
+\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
+
+% Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
+\newcount\mainmagstep
+\mainmagstep=\magstephalf
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+\ifx\bigger\relax
+\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+\else
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\fi
+% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
+% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
+% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+
+% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
+\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices and small examples (9pt).
+% We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic,
+% because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that.
+% Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they
+% aren't very useful.
+\setfont\ninett\ttshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\ninettsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\indrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\indit\itshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\indsl\slshape{9}{1000}
+\let\indtt=\ninett
+\let\indttsl=\ninettsl
+\let\indsf=\indrm
+\let\indbf=\indrm
+\setfont\indsc\scshape{10}{900}
+\font\indi=cmmi9
+\font\indsy=cmsy9
+
+% Fonts for title page:
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+
+% \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1}    % This size an font looked bad.
+% \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1}    % The letters were too crowded.
+% \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
+
+%\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315}      % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
+%\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315}      % Also, the size is a little larger than
+%\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315}      % being scaled magstep1.
+%\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
+%\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
+
+%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
+% but that is not a standard magnification.
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
+% don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
+% also require loading a lot more fonts).
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+  \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
+  \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
+  \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
+}
+
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
+% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
+% cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
+% \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
+% redefine \bf itself.
+\def\textfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+  \resetmathfonts}
+\def\titlefonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
+\def\secfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
+\def\indexfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl
+  \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc
+  \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \let\tenttsl=\indttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{12pt}}
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\textfonts
+
+% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\var=\smartslanted
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+\let\cite=\smartslanted
+
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+\def\t#1{%
+  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+  \null
+}
+\let\ttfont=\t
+\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+\def\key#1{{\smallrm\textfont2=\smallsy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
+\let\file=\samp
+\let\option=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+  {%
+    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+    %
+    % Switch to typewriter.
+    \tt
+    %
+    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+    %
+    % Turn off hyphenation.
+    \nohyphenation
+    %
+    \rawbackslash
+    \frenchspacing
+    #1%
+  }%
+  \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+%  -- rms.
+{
+  \catcode`\-=\active
+  \catcode`\_=\active
+  %
+  \global\def\code{\begingroup
+    \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
+    \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
+    \codex
+  }
+  %
+  % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
+  % just treat them as a normal -.
+  \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
+}
+
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+%\let\exp=\tclose  %Was temporary
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
+\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
+  \def\arg{#1}%
+  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
+% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
+\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
+
+% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\url=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\command=\code
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
+% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
+% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
+% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
+% a hypertex \special here.
+%
+\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
+\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
+  \else
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+      \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% second arg given, show both it and url
+    \else
+      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+% rms does not like the angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref.
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+\let\email=\uref
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+
+% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
+% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
+
+% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
+\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
+% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
+%
+\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+
+\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
+\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+   \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+   \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+   \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+   %
+   % Now you can print the title using @title.
+   \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
+   \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
+                    % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+                    \finishedtitlepagefalse
+                    \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
+   % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+   %
+   % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
+   \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
+   \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % @author should come last, but may come many times.
+   \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
+   \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
+      {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+   % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+   \let\oldpage = \page
+   \def\page{%
+      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+         \finishtitlepage
+      \fi
+      \oldpage
+      \let\page = \oldpage
+      \hbox{}}%
+%   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+   \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+      \finishtitlepage
+   \fi
+   % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+   % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+   % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+   % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+   \oldpage
+   \endgroup
+   %
+   % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+   \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \shortcontents
+     \contents
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+   \fi
+   %
+   \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \contents
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+   \fi
+   %
+   \HEADINGSon
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+   \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+   \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
+\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
+
+% Now make Tex use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 %
+
+\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+
+\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+  %
+  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
+  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
+  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
+}
+
+\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+%
+}% unbind the catcode of @.
+
+% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off         turns them off.
+% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+\HEADINGSoff
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% Produces Day Month Year style of output.
+\def\today{%
+  \number\day\space
+  \ifcase\month
+  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
+  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
+  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
+  \fi
+  \space\number\year}
+
+% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
+% It generates no output of its own.
+\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
+\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+
+
+\message{tables,}
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+
+\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+  \itemindex{#1}%
+  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+  %
+  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+    %
+    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+    % but leave it ragged-right.
+    \begingroup
+      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+    %
+    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
+    % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
+    % \baselineskip glue.
+    \nobreak
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+  \else
+    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
+    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
+    \noindent
+    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
+    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
+    % eventually be printed.
+    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
+    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
+    \unhbox0
+    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
+\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
+\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
+\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
+\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
+
+% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
+\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+
+% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
+\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
+
+\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\dontindex #1{}
+\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
+\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
+
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
+\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
+
+\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\begingroup %
+\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
+\let\itemindex=#1%
+\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
+\def\itemfont{#2}%
+\itemmax=\tableindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
+\exdentamount=\tableindent
+\parindent = 0pt
+\parskip = \smallskipamount
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\item = \internalBitem %
+\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
+\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
+\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
+\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
+\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+}
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+
+\def\itemizezzz #1{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
+  \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+}
+
+\def\itemizey #1#2{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\itemmax=\itemindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
+\exdentamount=\itemindent
+\parindent = 0pt %
+\parskip = \smallskipamount %
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\def\itemcontents{#1}%
+\let\item=\itemizeitem}
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% These are `.?!:;,'
+\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
+  \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
+\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
+  %
+  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+  \def\thearg{#1}%
+  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+  %
+  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
+  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+  \ifx\rest\empty
+    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
+    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+    %   not equal to itself.
+    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+    %
+    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+    % continuing to look for a <number>.
+    %
+    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+    \else
+      % It's a letter.
+      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+      \else
+        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
+    \numericenumerate
+  \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \thearg
+  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}%
+    \fi
+    \char\lccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}
+    \fi
+    \char\uccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+  \advance\itemno by -1
+  \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
+
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+\advance\itemno by 1
+{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
+\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
+{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
+\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
+\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
+\flushcr}
+
+% @multitable macros
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+
+% To make preamble:
+%
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+%   @item ...
+%
+%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+%   columns as desired.
+
+
+% Or use a template:
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item ...
+%   using the widest term desired in each column.
+%
+% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
+% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
+% will parse correctly, i.e.,
+%
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
+%      template}
+% Not:
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
+%      {Column 3 template}
+
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+
+% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
+% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
+
+% Sample multitable:
+
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+%   @item
+%   first col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   second col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   third col
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+%
+%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
+%   @end multitable
+
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+%                                                            to baseline.
+%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+%
+\newskip\multitableparskip
+\newskip\multitableparindent
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+\newskip\multitablelinespace
+\multitableparskip=0pt
+\multitableparindent=6pt
+\multitablecolspace=12pt
+\multitablelinespace=0pt
+
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+%
+\let\endsetuptable\relax
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+\let\columnfractions\relax
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+\newif\ifsetpercent
+
+% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
+% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
+% just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
+% percent of \hsize for this column.
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
+  \global\advance\colcount by 1
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
+  \setuptable
+}
+
+\newcount\colcount
+\def\setuptable#1{%
+  \def\firstarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
+    \let\go = \relax
+  \else
+    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
+      \global\setpercenttrue
+    \else
+      \ifsetpercent
+         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
+      \else
+         \global\advance\colcount by 1
+         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
+                            % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
+      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
+      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
+      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
+    \else
+      \let\go = \setuptable
+    \fi%
+  \fi
+  \go
+}
+
+% multitable syntax
+\def\tab{&\hskip1sp\relax} % 2/2/96
+                           % tiny skip here makes sure this column space is
+                           % maintained, even if it is never used.
+
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+%
+\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
+\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
+  \vskip\parskip
+  \let\item\crcr
+  \tolerance=9500
+  \hbadness=9500
+  \setmultitablespacing
+  \parskip=\multitableparskip
+  \parindent=\multitableparindent
+  \overfullrule=0pt
+  \global\colcount=0
+  \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
+  %
+  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
+  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+  %
+  % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
+  % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
+  % The table preamble
+  % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
+  \everycr{\noalign{%
+  %
+  % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+  % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
+  % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
+  % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+    \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
+  %
+  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+  \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
+    \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+  %
+  % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+  % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+  % the first one.
+  %
+  % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+  % to the width of each template entry.
+  %
+  % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+  % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+  % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
+  % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+  %
+  % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+  \rightskip=0pt
+  \ifnum\colcount=1
+    % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+    \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+  \else
+    \ifsetpercent \else
+      % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+      % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+      \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+    \fi
+   % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+  \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+  \fi
+  % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+  % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+  % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+  % For example:
+  % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+  % @item @code{#}
+  % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+  % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
+  % characters.
+  \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
+% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
+% current baselineskip.
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
+%% to keep lines equally spaced
+\let\multistrut = \strut
+%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+%% table. If not, do nothing.
+%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\else
+\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
+width0pt\relax} \fi
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi%
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi}
+
+
+\message{conditionals,}
+% Prevent errors for section commands.
+% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
+\def\ignoresections{%
+  \let\chapter=\relax
+  \let\unnumbered=\relax
+  \let\top=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
+  \let\section=\relax
+  \let\subsec=\relax
+  \let\subsubsec=\relax
+  \let\subsection=\relax
+  \let\subsubsection=\relax
+  \let\appendix=\relax
+  \let\appendixsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsection=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
+  \let\contents=\relax
+  \let\smallbook=\relax
+  \let\titlepage=\relax
+}
+
+% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
+% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
+% incorrectly.
+%
+\def\ignoremorecommands{%
+  \let\defcodeindex = \relax
+  \let\defcv = \relax
+  \let\deffn = \relax
+  \let\deffnx = \relax
+  \let\defindex = \relax
+  \let\defivar = \relax
+  \let\defmac = \relax
+  \let\defmethod = \relax
+  \let\defop = \relax
+  \let\defopt = \relax
+  \let\defspec = \relax
+  \let\deftp = \relax
+  \let\deftypefn = \relax
+  \let\deftypefun = \relax
+  \let\deftypevar = \relax
+  \let\deftypevr = \relax
+  \let\defun = \relax
+  \let\defvar = \relax
+  \let\defvr = \relax
+  \let\ref = \relax
+  \let\xref = \relax
+  \let\printindex = \relax
+  \let\pxref = \relax
+  \let\settitle = \relax
+  \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
+  \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
+  \let\everyheading = \relax
+  \let\evenheading = \relax
+  \let\oddheading = \relax
+  \let\everyfooting = \relax
+  \let\evenfooting = \relax
+  \let\oddfooting = \relax
+  \let\headings = \relax
+  \let\include = \relax
+  \let\lowersections = \relax
+  \let\down = \relax
+  \let\raisesections = \relax
+  \let\up = \relax
+  \let\set = \relax
+  \let\clear = \relax
+  \let\item = \relax
+}
+
+% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
+%
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+
+% Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
+%
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory = \comment
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+%
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+  % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+  \ignoresections
+  %
+  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
+  % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
+  % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
+  \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
+  %
+  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+  \catcode32 = 10
+  %
+  % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
+  \catcode`\{ = 9
+  \catcode`\} = 9
+  %
+  % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
+  \catcode`\@ = 12
+  %
+  % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
+  % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
+  %   @c @end ifinfo
+  % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
+  % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
+  \catcode`\c = 14
+  %
+  % And now expand that command.
+  \doignoretext
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off ignored text.
+%
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+
+\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
+\def\obstexwarn{%
+  \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
+  % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
+  % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
+    \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
+    \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
+    \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
+    \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
+    \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+    \fi
+}
+
+% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
+% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
+% uncomment the following line:
+%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
+
+% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
+% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
+%
+\def\nestedignore#1{%
+  \obstexwarn
+  % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
+  % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
+  % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
+  % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
+  % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
+  %
+  \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
+    % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+    \ignoresections
+    %
+    % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
+    % @end command again.
+    \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
+    %
+    % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
+    % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
+    % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
+    % undefine them.
+    %
+    % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
+    % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
+    \ignoremorecommands
+    %
+    % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
+    % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
+    % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
+    % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
+    % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
+    % stuff compared to the main input.
+    %
+    \nullfont
+    \let\tenrm = \nullfont  \let\tenit = \nullfont  \let\tensl = \nullfont
+    \let\tenbf = \nullfont  \let\tentt = \nullfont  \let\smallcaps = \nullfont
+    \let\tensf = \nullfont
+    % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in
+    % smallexample)
+    \let\indrm = \nullfont  \let\indit = \nullfont  \let\indsl = \nullfont
+    \let\indbf = \nullfont  \let\indtt = \nullfont  \let\indsc = \nullfont
+    \let\indsf = \nullfont
+    %
+    % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
+    \tracinglostchars = 0
+    %
+    % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
+    \frenchspacing
+    %
+    % Don't report underfull hboxes.
+    \hbadness = 10000
+    %
+    % Do minimal line-breaking.
+    \pretolerance = 10000
+    %
+    % Do not execute instructions in @tex
+    \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
+    % Do not execute macro definitions.
+    % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
+    \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
+}
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
+% losing inside @example, for instance.
+%
+\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
+  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
+  \parsearg\setxxx}
+\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
+  \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+  \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
+% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
+% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
+\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
+\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+{
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  %
+  % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
+  % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
+  % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
+  \gdef\value{\begingroup
+    \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
+    \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
+    \valuexxx}
+}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
+% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
+% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
+% about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
+% winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value
+% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
+% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
+% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+%
+\def\expandablevalue#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+  \else
+    \csname SET#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+%
+\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
+\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifsetfail
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
+  \fi
+}
+\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
+\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
+\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifclearfail
+  \fi
+}
+\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
+% following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make `@end iftex'
+% (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
+%
+\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
+\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
+\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
+\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
+
+% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
+% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
+% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
+% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
+% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
+% the @ifset might be nested.)
+%
+\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
+  \edef\temp{%
+    % Remember the current value of \E#1.
+    \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
+    %
+    % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
+    \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
+  }%
+  \temp
+}
+
+% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
+% control sequences after we've constructed them.
+%
+\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% @defininfoenclose.
+\let\definfoenclose=\comment
+
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+%
+\def\newindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
+    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
+
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+
+\def\newcodeindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}
+}
+
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+
+% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
+% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
+    \noexpand\doindex{#2}}%
+}
+
+% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+\def\indexdummies{%
+\def\ { }%
+% Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
+\def\"{\realbackslash "}%
+\def\`{\realbackslash `}%
+\def\'{\realbackslash '}%
+\def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
+\def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
+\def\={\realbackslash =}%
+\def\b{\realbackslash b}%
+\def\c{\realbackslash c}%
+\def\d{\realbackslash d}%
+\def\u{\realbackslash u}%
+\def\v{\realbackslash v}%
+\def\H{\realbackslash H}%
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
+\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
+\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
+\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
+\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
+\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
+\def\o{\realbackslash o}%
+\def\O{\realbackslash O}%
+\def\l{\realbackslash l}%
+\def\L{\realbackslash L}%
+\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
+% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
+% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
+% laboriously list every single command here.)
+\def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
+% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
+\let\{ = \mylbrace
+\let\} = \myrbrace
+\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
+\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
+\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
+%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
+\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
+\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
+\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
+\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
+\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
+\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
+\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
+\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
+\def\result{\realbackslash result}%
+\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
+\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
+\def\print{\realbackslash print}%
+\def\error{\realbackslash error}%
+\def\point{\realbackslash point}%
+\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
+\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
+\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
+\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
+\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
+\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
+\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
+\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
+\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
+\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
+\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
+\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
+\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
+\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
+\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
+\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
+\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
+\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
+\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
+\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
+\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
+\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
+\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
+\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
+%
+% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
+% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
+% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+\let\value = \expandablevalue
+%
+\unsepspaces
+% Turn off macro expansion
+\turnoffmacros
+}
+
+% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+% expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+{\obeyspaces
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
+
+% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
+% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
+\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
+\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
+\def\indexdummydots{...}
+
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+% Just ignore accents.
+\let\,=\indexdummyfont
+\let\"=\indexdummyfont
+\let\`=\indexdummyfont
+\let\'=\indexdummyfont
+\let\^=\indexdummyfont
+\let\~=\indexdummyfont
+\let\==\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\c=\indexdummyfont
+\let\d=\indexdummyfont
+\let\u=\indexdummyfont
+\let\v=\indexdummyfont
+\let\H=\indexdummyfont
+\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{oe}%
+\def\ae{ae}%
+\def\aa{aa}%
+\def\OE{OE}%
+\def\AE{AE}%
+\def\AA{AA}%
+\def\o{o}%
+\def\O{O}%
+\def\l{l}%
+\def\L{L}%
+\def\ss{ss}%
+\let\w=\indexdummyfont
+\let\t=\indexdummyfont
+\let\r=\indexdummyfont
+\let\i=\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
+\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
+\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
+\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
+%Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
+%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
+\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
+\let\code=\indexdummyfont
+\let\url=\indexdummyfont
+\let\uref=\indexdummyfont
+\let\env=\indexdummyfont
+\let\command=\indexdummyfont
+\let\option=\indexdummyfont
+\let\file=\indexdummyfont
+\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
+\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
+\let\key=\indexdummyfont
+\let\var=\indexdummyfont
+\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
+\let\dots=\indexdummydots
+\def\@{@}%
+}
+
+% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
+% We must first make another character (@) an escape
+% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
+ @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+
+\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
+
+% For \ifx comparisons.
+\def\emptymacro{\empty}
+
+% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
+%
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
+
+% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
+% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
+% is with defuns, which call us directly.
+%
+\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
+  \fi
+  {%
+    \count255=\lastpenalty
+    {%
+      \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+      \escapechar=`\\
+      {%
+        \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
+        \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+        % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+        %
+        \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+        %
+        % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
+        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
+          \let\subentry = \empty
+        \else
+          \def\subentry{ #3}%
+        \fi
+        %
+        % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
+        % off to get the string to sort by.
+        {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
+        %
+        % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
+        \toks0 = {#2}%
+        %
+        % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
+        % string.  And include a space.
+        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
+          \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+        \fi
+        %
+        % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key
+        % and the original text, including any font commands.  We write
+        % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file, texindex reduces to
+        % two when writing the .??s sorted result.
+        \edef\temp{%
+          \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+            \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+        }%
+        %
+        % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+        % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+        % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+        % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
+        % like this:
+        % @end defun
+        % @tindex whatever
+        % @defun ...
+        % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+        % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+        % the previous defun.
+        %
+        % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
+        % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+        %
+        % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+        %
+        \iflinks
+          \ifvmode
+            \skip0 = \lastskip
+            \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
+          \fi
+          %
+          \temp % do the write
+          %
+          %
+          \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
+        \fi
+      }%
+    }%
+    \penalty\count255
+  }%
+}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+%  \initial {c}
+%     before the first topic whose initial is c
+%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
+%  \primary {topic}
+%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+%     for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+%
+\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
+\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
+  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+  %
+  \indexfonts \rm
+  \tolerance = 9500
+  \indexbreaks
+  %
+  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
+  % \initial {@}
+  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
+  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
+  \catcode`\@ = 11
+  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+  \ifeof 1
+    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+    % there is some text.
+    \putwordIndexNonexistent
+  \else
+    %
+    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+    \read 1 to \temp
+    \ifeof 1
+      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
+    \else
+      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+      % to make right now.
+      \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
+      \catcode`\\ = 0
+      \escapechar = `\\
+      \begindoublecolumns
+      \input \jobname.#1s
+      \enddoublecolumns
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+\endgroup}
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+\def\initial#1{{%
+  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
+  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+  %
+  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
+  \removelastskip
+  %
+  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+  \penalty -300
+  %
+  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
+  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
+  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
+  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
+  %
+  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
+  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
+  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+  %
+  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
+  \nobreak
+}}
+
+% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
+% flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
+% entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
+  %
+  % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+  % affect previous text.
+  \par
+  %
+  % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+  \parfillskip = 0in
+  %
+  % No extra space above this paragraph.
+  \parskip = 0in
+  %
+  % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+  \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+  %
+  % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+  % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
+  % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
+  % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+  % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+  %
+  % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+  % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+  \hangindent = 2em
+  %
+  % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+  % with blank space.
+  \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+  %
+  % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+  %
+  % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
+  % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
+  \noindent
+  %
+  % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
+  #1%
+  % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+  % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
+  % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+  \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+  \def\tempb{#2}%
+  \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+  \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+  \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+    %
+    % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+    % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+    % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+    \hfil\penalty50
+    \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+    %
+    % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+    % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
+    % \hbox ensues.
+    \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+  \fi%
+  \par
+\endgroup}
+
+% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+
+\def\secondary #1#2{
+{\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
+\hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
+\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
+}}
+
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+  % Grab any single-column material above us.
+  \output = {%
+    %
+    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
+    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
+    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
+    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
+    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
+      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+      % Unvbox the main output page.
+      \unvbox\PAGE
+      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+    }%
+  }%
+  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
+  %
+  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+  %
+  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
+  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
+  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+  %
+  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
+  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+  %
+  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+  % been clobbered.
+  %
+  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  %
+  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
+  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+  \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
+  \vsize = 2\vsize
+}
+
+% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
+% the last.
+%
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+  % previous page.
+  \dimen@ = \vsize
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2
+  %
+  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
+  \onepageout\pagesofar
+  \unvbox255
+  \penalty\outputpenalty
+}
+\def\pagesofar{%
+  % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+  % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
+  \unvbox\partialpage
+  %
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
+  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+}
+\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+  \output = {%
+    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
+    % current page, no automatic page break.
+    \balancecolumns
+    %
+    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
+    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
+    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
+    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
+    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
+    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
+    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
+  }%
+  \eject
+  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+  %
+  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
+  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
+  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
+  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
+  \pagegoal = \vsize
+}
+\def\balancecolumns{%
+  % Called at the end of the double column material.
+  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
+  \dimen@ = \ht0
+  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
+  {%
+    \vbadness = 10000
+    \loop
+      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
+      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+    \repeat
+  }%
+  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
+  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+  %
+  \pagesofar
+}
+\catcode`\@ = \other
+
+
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Define chapters, sections, etc.
+
+\newcount\chapno
+\newcount\secno        \secno=0
+\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
+\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
+\def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+
+% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
+% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
+\def\thischapter{}
+\def\thissection{}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% Choose a numbered-heading macro
+% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
+% #2 is text for heading
+\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \chapterzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \seczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \chapterzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
+\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \appendixzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \appendixzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
+\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
+\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
+\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
+\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\the\chapno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
+\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \appendixno by 1
+\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
+                       {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\global\let\section = \appendixsec
+\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}
+
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
+\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+
+% @top is like @unnumbered.
+\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+
+\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+%
+% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+% argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+% expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+% to be executed, not expanded).
+%
+% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
+% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
+% the toc entries.)
+\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
+%
+\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
+\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% Sections.
+\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
+\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz #1{%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
+\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                    {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
+\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
+                                    {\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsubsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
+                                    {\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
+% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
+\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
+\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
+\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
+%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+%          overlong headings to fold.
+%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
+
+
+\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
+\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
+{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
+\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
+\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+
+\newskip\chapheadingskip
+
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
+
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+\def\CHAPFplain{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
+
+% Plain chapter opening.
+% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
+\def\chfplain#1#2{%
+  \pchapsepmacro
+  {%
+    \chapfonts \rm
+    \def\chapnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+  }%
+  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% Plain opening for unnumbered.
+\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
+
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
+  \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
+    \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+    \leftskip = \rightskip
+    \parfillskip = 0pt
+  }%
+  \chfplain{#1}{}%
+}}
+
+\CHAPFplain % The default
+
+\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+\par\penalty 5000 %
+}
+
+\def\centerchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt
+                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\CHAPFopen{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+
+
+% Section titles.
+\newskip\secheadingskip
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
+\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
+\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsection titles.
+\newskip \subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
+\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsubsection titles.
+\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
+\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
+\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
+
+
+% Print any size section title.
+%
+% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
+% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
+    \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
+  }%
+  {%
+    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+    \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
+    %
+    % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
+    \def\secnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    %
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
+          \unhbox0 #3}%
+  }%
+  \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
+}
+
+
+\message{toc,}
+\newwrite\tocfile
+
+% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
+% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
+%
+% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
+% given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
+%
+\newif\iftocfileopened
+\def\writetocentry#1{%
+  \iftocfileopened\else
+    \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+    \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+  \fi
+  \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
+}
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\newcount\savepageno
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+
+% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
+% to \tocfile.
+%
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+   % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+   % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+   % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+   % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+   \contentsalignmacro
+   \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+   %
+   % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+   % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+   \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
+   \savepageno = \pageno
+   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+      \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
+      % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
+      % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
+      %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
+      \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+      \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+      %
+      % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+      \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+}
+
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+\def\contents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+     \ifeof 1 \else
+       \closein 1
+       \input \jobname.toc
+     \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \pageno = \savepageno
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\def\summarycontents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+      %
+      \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
+      \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
+      % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+      \secfonts
+      \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
+      \rm
+      \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+      \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
+      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
+      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
+      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+      \ifeof 1 \else
+        \closein 1
+        \input \jobname.toc
+      \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \pageno = \savepageno
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
+\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}%
+}
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
+% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
+% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix }
+\newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
+
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
+  % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
+  \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
+  %
+  % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
+  \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
+}
+
+\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
+\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
+\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
+\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+   \begingroup
+     \chapentryfonts
+     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+   \endgroup
+   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
+% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
+% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
+% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
+\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
+  % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
+  % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
+  % have to do the usual translation tricks.
+  \entry{#1}{#2}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+
+% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+% Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
+\newbox\dblarrowbox    \newbox\longdblarrowbox
+\newbox\pushcharbox    \newbox\bullbox
+\newbox\equivbox       \newbox\errorbox
+
+%{\tentt
+%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
+% Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
+%\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
+%                                      depth .1ex\hfil}
+%}
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
+
+\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+   \vbox{
+      \hrule height\dimen2
+      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
+         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+      \hrule height\dimen2}
+    \hfil}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\def\tex{\begingroup
+  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
+  \catcode `\%=14
+  \catcode 43=12 % plus
+  \catcode`\"=12
+  \catcode`\==12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \escapechar=`\\
+  %
+  \let\b=\ptexb
+  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+  \let\c=\ptexc
+  \let\,=\ptexcomma
+  \let\.=\ptexdot
+  \let\dots=\ptexdots
+  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
+  \let\!=\ptexexclam
+  \let\i=\ptexi
+  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
+  \let\+=\tabalign
+  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+  \let\*=\ptexstar
+  \let\t=\ptext
+  %
+  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+  \def\@{@}%
+\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+
+% Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
+% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+% space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+% should produce a line of output anyway.
+%
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
+
+% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
+% for use in \parsearg.
+{\sepspaces%
+\global\let\obeyedspace= }
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+\endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+\removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
+
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
+% environment contents.
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\long\def\cartouche{%
+\begingroup
+        \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+        \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
+        \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+                          \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+        \cartouter=\hsize
+        \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+%                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
+%                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
+        \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+        % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+        \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+        \vbox\bgroup
+                \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+                \carttop
+                \hbox\bgroup
+                        \hskip\lskip
+                        \vrule\kern3pt
+                        \vbox\bgroup
+                                \hsize=\cartinner
+                                \kern3pt
+                                \begingroup
+                                        \baselineskip=\normbskip
+                                        \lineskip=\normlskip
+                                        \parskip=\normpskip
+                                        \vskip -\parskip
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+                                \endgroup
+                                \kern3pt
+                        \egroup
+                        \kern3pt\vrule
+                        \hskip\rskip
+                \egroup
+                \cartbot
+        \egroup
+\endgroup
+}}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
+  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+  \singlespace
+  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+  \parskip = 0pt
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
+  % at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+    \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+    \let\nonarrowing=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
+% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
+%
+% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
+% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
+% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
+% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
+% the environment.
+%
+\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
+
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
+\def\lisp{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
+  \tt
+  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+  \gobble       % eat return
+}
+
+% @example: Same as @lisp.
+\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
+% redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
+% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
+% whatever) command.
+%
+% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
+% @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
+%
+\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
+\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
+% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \indexfonts
+  \lisp
+}
+
+% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+%
+\def\display{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \indexfonts \rm
+  \display
+}
+
+% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\def\format{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smallformatx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \indexfonts \rm
+  \format
+}
+
+% @flushleft (same as @format).
+%
+\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+
+% @flushright.
+%
+\def\flushright{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
+  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins.
+%
+\def\quotation{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+  \singlespace
+  \parindent=0pt
+  % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+  % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
+  \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
+  %
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% Define formatter for defuns
+% First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
+\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+
+\newcount\parencount
+% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
+% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
+\def\activeparens{%
+\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
+\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+
+\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
+\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+% This is used to turn on special parens
+% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
+\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
+
+% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
+% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
+\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
+  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+}
+%
+% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
+\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+%
+\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
+  % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
+  \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
+  \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
+%
+\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
+} % End of definition inside \activeparens
+%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
+%% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
+\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
+\def\ampnr{\&}
+\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
+\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
+
+% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
+% #1 should be the function name.
+% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
+
+\def\defname #1#2{%
+% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
+% outside the @def...
+\dimen2=\leftskip
+\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
+\noindent
+\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
+\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
+\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
+\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
+% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
+% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
+% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
+{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
+% so that \rightline will obey them.
+\advance \hsize by -\dimen2
+\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
+% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
+\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+{\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
+}
+
+% Actually process the body of a definition
+% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
+% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
+% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
+%    such as \defunheader.
+
+\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
+\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
+
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
+% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+%
+\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
+
+% @deftypemethod has an extra argument that nothing else does.  Sigh.
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
+% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+% #5 is the method's return type.
+%
+\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
+
+\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
+% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
+% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
+
+\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active %
+\obeylines\spacesplit#3}
+
+% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody.  It could probably be used for
+% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
+%
+\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %
+  \medbreak %
+  % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+  % so that it will exit this group.
+  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+  \parindent=0in
+  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+}
+
+\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+}
+
+% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
+% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
+% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
+% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+%
+% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
+% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
+% won't strip off the braces.
+%
+\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+}
+
+% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
+% braces (if any).  That's what this does.
+%
+\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
+
+% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
+% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
+% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+%
+\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
+  #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
+}%
+
+\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% Split up #2 at the first space token.
+% call #1 with two arguments:
+%  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
+%  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
+% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
+% and the second is passed as empty.
+
+{\obeylines
+\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
+\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
+\ifx\relax #3%
+#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
+
+% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
+
+% Define @defun.
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
+% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+
+\def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+\hyphenchar\tensl=0
+#1%
+\hyphenchar\tensl=45
+\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
+\boldbraxnoamp
+\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+}
+
+% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+
+% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+
+\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+
+\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defun == @deffn Function
+
+\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+
+\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
+% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
+\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
+\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+
+% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
+% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
+\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
+
+% #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
+% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup
+\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
+%               at least some C++ text from working
+\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
+\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+
+\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
+
+\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
+
+\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
+
+\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defunx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
+
+\def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
+\def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
+\def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypemethodx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
+
+% @defmethod, and so on
+
+% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
+
+\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
+\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+
+\def\defopheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{}\putwordon\ #1}%
+\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypemethod CLASS RETURN-TYPE METHOD ARG...
+%
+\def\deftypemethod{%
+  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defmethod == @defop Method
+%
+\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
+\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \defunargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+
+\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
+\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+
+\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable}
+
+\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
+
+\def\defivarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\putwordDefivar\ \putwordof\ #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc.,
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc.
+
+\def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
+\def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now @defvar
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
+% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
+% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
+
+% @defvr Counter foo-count
+
+\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
+
+\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% @defvar == @defvr Variable
+
+\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
+
+\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
+
+\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
+
+\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypevar int foobar
+
+\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
+% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
+\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
+\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+\endgroup}
+\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
+
+\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
+
+\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defvarx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx.
+
+\def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now define @deftp
+% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
+
+\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
+
+% @deftp Class window height width ...
+
+\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
+
+\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc.
+
+\def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
+
+
+\message{macros,}
+% @macro.
+
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+ \newwrite\macscribble
+ \def\scanmacro#1{%
+   \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+   % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+   \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
+   % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
+   \toks0={#1\endinput}%
+   \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+   \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+   \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+   \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+   \input \jobname.tmp
+   \endgroup
+}
+\else
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
+\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
+\fi
+
+\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
+\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
+\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
+\def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
+                    % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
+
+% Utility routines.
+% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
+\def\cslet#1#2{%
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\expandafter\let
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\csname#1\endcsname
+\csname#2\endcsname}
+
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
+}
+
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+}
+
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
+
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
+% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+  \catcode`\~=12
+  \catcode`\^=12
+  \catcode`\_=12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \catcode`\+=12
+  \catcode`\{=12
+  \catcode`\}=12
+  \catcode`\@=12
+  \catcode`\^^M=12
+  \usembodybackslash}
+
+\def\macroargctxt{%
+  \catcode`\~=12
+  \catcode`\^=12
+  \catcode`\_=12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \catcode`\+=12
+  \catcode`\@=12
+  \catcode`\\=12}
+
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
+% where N is the macro parameter number.
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+
+{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
+ @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
+ @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+
+\def\macroxxx#1{%
+  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
+     \paramno=0%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+  \fi
+  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
+     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
+     \else \errmessage{The name \the\macname\space is reserved}\fi
+     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
+     % Add the macroname to \macrolist
+     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
+     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
+       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
+  \fi
+  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
+  \fi}
+
+\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
+\def\unmacroxxx#1{%
+  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
+    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
+    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
+    \begingroup
+      \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
+      \def\do##1{%
+        \def\tempb{##1}%
+        \ifx\tempa\tempb
+          % remove this
+        \else
+          \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
+          \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
+        \fi}%
+      \def\newmacrolist{}%
+      % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
+      \macrolist
+      \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
+    \endgroup
+  \else
+    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+
+% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
+% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
+% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+
+% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
+% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
+% it to # just before using the token list produced.
+%
+% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
+% the macro is used.
+
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+    \advance\paramno by 1%
+    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+  \fi\next}
+
+% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
+% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+
+\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+
+% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+\def\defmacro{%
+  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+  \ifrecursive
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+        \egroup
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+      \paramlist{%
+          \egroup
+          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+
+% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
+% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
+% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
+    \expandafter\parsearg
+  \fi \next}
+
+% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
+% expanded by \write.
+\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
+  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+
+
+% @alias.
+\def\alias#1=#2{\gdef#1{#2}}
+
+
+\message{cross references,}
+\newwrite\auxfile
+
+\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is relatively simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
+\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
+\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
+\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\relax
+
+% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
+\def\donoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\unnumbnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\appendixnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Yappendixletterandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+%
+\def\anchor#1{\setref{#1}{Ynothing}}
+
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
+% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have
+% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
+% aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
+% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{{%
+  \indexdummies
+  \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+  \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+  \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
+}}
+
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+  \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
+  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+      \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+    \else
+      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
+      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+        \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      \else
+        \ifhavexrefs
+          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+          \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+        \else
+          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+          \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+        \fi%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+  % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+  % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+  % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+  % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+  % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+  \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+    \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}%
+  \else
+    % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+    % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+    % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+    % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+    % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+    {\normalturnoffactive
+     % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+     % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+     \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+     \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+    }%
+    % [mynode],
+    [\printednodename],\space
+    % page 3
+    \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+  \fi
+\endgroup}
+
+% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
+
+% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
+% and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
+\def\dosetq#1#2{%
+  {\let\folio=0
+   \normalturnoffactive
+   \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
+   \iflinks
+     \next
+   \fi
+  }%
+}
+
+% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
+% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
+% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
+
+\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
+
+% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
+
+\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
+
+\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
+
+\def\Ynothing{}
+
+\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
+    % If not defined, say something at least.
+    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+    \iflinks
+      \ifhavexrefs
+        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+      \else
+        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+          \global\warnedxrefstrue
+          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % It's defined, so just use it.
+    \csname X#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+%
+\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
+  % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
+  \catcode`\\ = 0
+  \afterassignment\endgroup
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
+}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
+\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^@=\other
+  \catcode`\^^A=\other
+  \catcode`\^^B=\other
+  \catcode`\^^C=\other
+  \catcode`\^^D=\other
+  \catcode`\^^E=\other
+  \catcode`\^^F=\other
+  \catcode`\^^G=\other
+  \catcode`\^^H=\other
+  \catcode`\^^K=\other
+  \catcode`\^^L=\other
+  \catcode`\^^N=\other
+  \catcode`\^^P=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+  \catcode`\^^R=\other
+  \catcode`\^^S=\other
+  \catcode`\^^T=\other
+  \catcode`\^^U=\other
+  \catcode`\^^V=\other
+  \catcode`\^^W=\other
+  \catcode`\^^X=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+  \catcode`\^^[=\other
+  \catcode`\^^\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^]=\other
+  \catcode`\^^^=\other
+  \catcode`\^^_=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
+  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
+  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+  %
+  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+  %
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \catcode`\[=\other
+  \catcode`\]=\other
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\$=\other
+  \catcode`\#=\other
+  \catcode`\&=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
+  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
+  {%
+    \count 1=128
+    \def\loop{%
+      \catcode\count 1=\other
+      \advance\count 1 by 1
+      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+  % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
+  % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
+  % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
+  % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
+  % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
+  % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+  \catcode`\{=1
+  \catcode`\}=2
+  \catcode`\%=\other
+  \catcode`\'=0
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  %
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \closein 1
+    \input \jobname.aux
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+  \fi
+  % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+  \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% Footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+  %
+  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+  \let\@sf\empty
+  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+  %
+  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+  \unskip
+  \thisfootno\@sf
+  \footnotezzz
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
+%
+\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
+  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+  % So reset some parameters.
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+  \floatingpenalty\@MM
+  \leftskip\z@skip
+  \rightskip\z@skip
+  \spaceskip\z@skip
+  \xspaceskip\z@skip
+  \parindent\defaultparindent
+  %
+  % Hang the footnote text off the number.
+  \hang
+  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+  %
+  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
+  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+  \footstrut
+  \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
+  \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
+\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
+\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
+\def\@foot{\strut\egroup}
+
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+\def\setleading#1{%
+  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
+  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselines
+  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+  }%
+}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+  \vadjust{%
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+%
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+% undone and the next image would fail.
+\openin 1 = epsf.tex
+\ifeof 1 \else
+  \closein 1
+  % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
+  % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
+  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
+  \input epsf.tex
+\fi
+%
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
+%
+% Only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+\def\image#1{%
+  \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+    \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+      \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+        \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+        \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+        \global\warnednoepsftrue
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \centerline{\pdfimage #1.pdf}%
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Arguments to @image:
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+% #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+  % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+  % If the image is by itself, center it.
+  \ifvmode
+    \nobreak\medskip
+    \nobreak
+    \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}%
+    \bigbreak
+  \else
+    % In the middle of a paragraph, no extra space.
+    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+\message{localization,}
+
+% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
+% @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
+% properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
+% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
+%
+\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
+\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
+  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
+  % Read the file if it exists.
+  \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+  \ifeof1
+    \errhelp = \nolanghelp
+    \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
+    \let\temp = \relax
+  \else
+    \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
+  \fi
+  \temp
+  \endgroup
+}
+\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
+is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
+should work if nowhere else does.}
+
+
+% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
+% likely, but for now just recognize it.
+\let\documentencoding = \comment
+
+
+% Page size parameters.
+%
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness = 10000
+
+% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 2000
+
+% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
+%
+\def\setemergencystretch{%
+  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+  \else
+    \emergencystretch = \hsize
+    \divide\emergencystretch by 40
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
+% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  Then whoever calls us can
+% set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \voffset = #3\relax
+  \topskip = #6\relax
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  %
+  \vsize = #1\relax
+  \advance\vsize by \topskip
+  \outervsize = \vsize
+  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
+  \pageheight = \vsize
+  %
+  \hsize = #2\relax
+  \outerhsize = \hsize
+  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+  \pagewidth = \hsize
+  %
+  \normaloffset = #4\relax
+  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
+  %
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+  \setemergencystretch
+}
+
+% @letterpaper (the default).
+\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \setleading{13.2pt}%
+  %
+  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
+  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+}}
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
+\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
+  \setleading{12pt}%
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \deftypemargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = .5cm
+  %
+  \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
+  \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
+  \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
+  \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
+}}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \setleading{12pt}%
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+  %
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+}}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
+% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \setleading{13.6pt}%
+  %
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
+  %
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
+\def\afourwide{%
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+  %
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}
+
+% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
+% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
+% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
+%
+\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
+\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
+  \globaldefs = 1
+  %
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \setleading{13.2pt}%
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+}}
+
+% Set default to letter.
+%
+\letterpaper
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\~=\other
+\catcode`\^=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode`\+=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
+% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Turn off all special characters except @
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\def~{{\tt\char126}}
+\chardef\hat=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active
+\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\def|{{\tt\char124}}
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active
+\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+\catcode`\+=\active
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+%\catcode 27=\active
+%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
+
+% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
+{\catcode`\==\active
+\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
+
+\catcode`+=\active
+\catcode`\_=\active
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
+% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
+\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
+\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
+%{\catcode`\\=\other
+%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
+
+% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
+{\catcode`\\=\active
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
+
+% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+\escapechar=`\@
+
+% \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
+\catcode`\\=\active
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
+% even after parsing them.
+@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@realbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus}
+
+@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@normalbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus}
+
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+@otherifyactive
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+@global@let\ = @eatinput
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+%
+@gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+  @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active}
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.  The @rm below
+% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10
+@catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other
+
+@textfonts
+@rm
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
+@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%H"
+@c time-stamp-end: "}"
+@c End:
diff --git a/doc/vtysh.1 b/doc/vtysh.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..302e016
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/vtysh.1
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+.TH VTYSH 1 "July 2000" "Zebra Beast - VTY shell" "Version 0.88"
+
+.SH NAME
+vtysh \- a integrated shell for Zebra routing software
+
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B vtysh
+[
+.B \-e command
+]
+
+.SH DESCBGPTION
+.B vtysh
+is a integrated shell for
+.B Zebra
+routing engine.
+
+
+.SH OPTIONS
+
+.TP
+\fB\-e
+Specify command to be executed under batch mode.
+
+
+.SH COMMANDS
+
+\fB Almost Zebra commands.
+
+\fB ping
+\fB traceroute
+\fB telnnet
+
+\fB start-shell
+\fB start-shell bash
+\fB start-shell zsh
+
+
+.SH FILES
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/etc/Zebra.conf
+The default location of the 
+.B vtysh
+config file.
+
+
+.SH WARNING
+This man page is intended as a quick reference for command line
+options, and for config file commands. The definitive document is the
+Info file \fBZebra\fR.
+
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+References to other related man pages:
+
+bgpd(8), ripd(8), ripngd(8), ospfd(8), ospf6d(8), zebra(8)
+
+
+.SH BUGS
+.B vtysh
+eats bugs for breakfast. If you have food for the maintainers try 
+.BI <bug-zebra@gnu.org>
+
+
+.SH AUTHOR[S]
+See <\fBwww.zebra.org\fR>, or the Info file for an accurate list of authors.
+
diff --git a/doc/vtysh.texi b/doc/vtysh.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72490db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/vtysh.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+@node VTY shell
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter VTY shell
+
+@command{vtysh} is integrated shell of Zebra software.
+
+To use vtysh please specify ---enable-vtysh to configure script.  To use
+PAM for authentication use ---with-libpam option to configure script.
+
+vtysh only searches @value{INSTALL_PREFIX_ETC} path for vtysh.conf which
+is the vtysh configuration file.  Vtysh does not search current
+directory for configuration file because the file includes user
+authentication settings.
+
+Currently, vtysh.conf has only one command.
+
+@example
+!
+username foo nopassword
+!
+@end example
+
+With this set, user foo does not need password authentication for user vtysh.
+With PAM vtysh uses PAM authentication mechanism.
+
+If vtysh is compiled without PAM authentication, every user can use vtysh
+without authentication.
diff --git a/doc/zebra.8 b/doc/zebra.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..190f4a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/zebra.8
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+.TH ZEBRA 8 "July 2000" "Zebra" "Version 0.88"
+
+.SH NAME
+zebra \- a routing manager for use with associated components
+
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B zebra
+[
+.B \-bdhklrv
+]
+[
+.B \-f config-file
+]
+[
+.B \-i pid-file
+]
+[
+.B \-P port-number
+]
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B zebra 
+is a routing manager that implements the 
+.B zebra
+route engine.
+.B zebra 
+supports RIPv1, RIPv2, RIPng, OSPF, OSPF6, BGP4+, and BGP4-.
+
+
+.SH OPTIONS
+
+.TP
+\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-batch\fR
+Runs in batch mode, \fBzebra\fR parses its config and exits.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-daemon\fR
+Runs in daemon mode, forking and exiting from tty.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-config-file \fR\fIconfig-file\fR
+Specifies the config file to use for startup. If not specified this option will likely default to \fB\fI/usr/local/etc/zebra.conf\fR.
+ 
+.TP
+\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
+A brief message.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-pid_file \fR\fIpid-file\fR
+When zebra starts its process idenifier is written to
+\fB\fIpid-file\fR.  The init system uses the recorded PID to stop or
+restart zebra.  The likely default is \fB\fI/var/run/zebra.pid\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-k\fR, \fB\-\-keep_kernel\fR
+On startup, don't delete self inserted routes.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-log_mode\fR
+Turn verbose logging on.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-P\fR, \fB\-\-vty_port \fR\fIport-number\fR 
+Specify the port that the zebra VTY will listen on. This defaults to
+2602, as specified in \fB\fI/etc/services\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-retain\fR 
+When the program terminates, retain routes added by \fBzebra\fR.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR
+Print the version and exit.
+
+
+.SH COMMANDS
+
+\fB table [TABLENO] \fR -- for use with multi-table kernels 
+
+\fB ip route [NETWORK] [GATEWAY] \fR
+\fB ipv6 route [NETWORK] [GATEWAY] \fR
+
+\fB show ip route \fR
+\fB show ipv6 route \fR
+\fB show interface \fR
+\fB show ipforward \fR
+\fB show ipv6forward \fR
+
+.TP
+\fB interface [IFNAME] \fR
+\fB shutdown \fR
+\fB no shutdown \fR
+\fB ip address [IP-ADDRESS] \fR
+\fB description [DESCRIPTION] \fR
+\fB multicast \fR
+\fB no multicast \fR
+
+
+.SH FILES
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/sbin/zebra
+The default location of the 
+.B zebra
+binary.
+
+.TP
+.BI /usr/local/etc/zebra.conf
+The default location of the 
+.B zebra
+config file.
+
+.TP
+.BI $(PWD)/zebra.log 
+If the 
+.B zebra
+process is config'd to output logs to a file, then you will find this
+file in the directory where you started \fBzebra\fR.
+
+
+.SH WARNING
+This man page is intended as a quick reference for command line options, and for config file commands. The definitive document is the Info file \fBzebra\fR.
+
+
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+The zebra process may log to standard output, to a VTY, to a log file, or through syslog to the system logs. 
+.B zebra
+supports many debugging options, see the Info file, or the source for details.
+
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+References to other related man pages:
+
+ripngd(8), ospfd(8), ospf6d(8), bgpd(8), zebra(8), vtysh(1)
+
+
+
+.SH BUGS
+.B zebra
+eats bugs for breakfast. If you have food for the maintainers try 
+.BI <bug-zebra@gnu.org>
+
+
+.SH AUTHOR[S]
+See <\fBwww.zebra.org\fR>, or the Info file for an accurate list of authors.
+
diff --git a/doc/zebra.info b/doc/zebra.info
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca805e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/zebra.info
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+This is zebra.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.2 from zebra.texi.
+
+INFO-DIR-SECTION Routing Software:
+START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+* Zebra: (zebra).		The GNU Zebra routing software
+END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+
+   This file documents the GNU Zebra software which manages common
+TCP/IP routing protocols.
+
+   This is Edition 0.1, last updated 12 September 2002 of `The GNU
+Zebra Manual', for Zebra Version 0.93b.
+
+   Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Kunihiro Ishiguro
+
+   Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+
+   Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of
+this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+   Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a
+translation approved by Kunihiro Ishiguro.
+
+
+Indirect:
+zebra.info-1: 1121
+zebra.info-2: 48818
+zebra.info-3: 95581
+zebra.info-4: 143934
+
+Tag Table:
+(Indirect)
+Node: Top1121
+Node: Overview1646
+Node: About Zebra3063
+Node: System Architecture5332
+Node: Supported Platforms8330
+Node: Supported RFC9317
+Node: How to get Zebra11119
+Node: Mailing List11824
+Node: Bug Reports12491
+Node: Installation13336
+Node: Configure the Software13767
+Ref: Configure the Software-Footnote-116134
+Node: Build the Software17776
+Node: Install the Software18318
+Node: Basic commands19689
+Node: Config Commands20402
+Node: Basic Config Commands21284
+Node: Sample Config File23682
+Node: Common Invocation Options24442
+Node: Virtual Terminal Interfaces25564
+Node: VTY Overview26069
+Node: VTY Modes27353
+Node: VTY View Mode27793
+Node: VTY Enable Mode28047
+Node: VTY Other Modes28311
+Node: VTY CLI Commands28473
+Node: CLI Movement Commands28923
+Node: CLI Editing Commands29456
+Node: CLI Advanced Commands30029
+Node: Zebra30780
+Node: Invoking zebra31287
+Node: Interface Commands31873
+Node: Static Route Commands32703
+Node: zebra Terminal Mode Commands34790
+Node: RIP35751
+Node: Starting and Stopping ripd36686
+Node: RIP netmask38107
+Node: RIP Configuration39229
+Node: How to Announce RIP route43124
+Node: Filtering RIP Routes45653
+Node: RIP Metric Manipulation47112
+Node: RIP distance48015
+Node: RIP route-map48818
+Node: RIP Authentication51320
+Node: RIP Timers52410
+Node: Show RIP Information53685
+Node: RIP Debug Commands55048
+Node: RIPng56032
+Node: Invoking ripngd56350
+Node: ripngd Configuration56607
+Node: ripngd Terminal Mode Commands57346
+Node: ripngd Filtering Commands57696
+Node: OSPFv258195
+Node: Configuring ospfd58752
+Node: OSPF router59229
+Node: OSPF area60960
+Node: OSPF interface63174
+Node: Redistribute routes to OSPF65956
+Node: Showing OSPF information68072
+Node: Debugging OSPF69292
+Node: OSPFv370303
+Node: OSPF6 router70621
+Node: OSPF6 area70978
+Node: OSPF6 interface71150
+Node: Redistribute routes to OSPF672002
+Node: Showing OSPF6 information72306
+Node: BGP73111
+Node: Starting BGP73972
+Node: BGP router74557
+Node: BGP distance75793
+Node: BGP decision process76234
+Node: BGP network76490
+Node: BGP route76671
+Node: Route Aggregation77232
+Node: Redistribute to BGP77784
+Node: BGP Peer78293
+Node: Defining Peer78471
+Node: BGP Peer commands79087
+Node: Peer filtering81458
+Node: BGP Peer Group81949
+Node: BGP Address Family82251
+Node: Autonomous System82396
+Node: AS Path Regular Expression83227
+Node: Display BGP Routes by AS Path84490
+Node: AS Path Access List84919
+Node: Using AS Path in Route Map85373
+Node: Private AS Numbers85639
+Node: BGP Communities Attribute85784
+Node: BGP Community Lists88245
+Node: Numbered BGP Community Lists90926
+Node: BGP Community in Route Map92500
+Node: Display BGP Routes by Community94427
+Node: Using BGP Communities Attribute95581
+Node: BGP Extended Communities Attribute99139
+Node: BGP Extended Community Lists100905
+Node: BGP Extended Communities in Route Map102806
+Node: Displaying BGP routes103249
+Node: Show IP BGP103475
+Node: More Show IP BGP104197
+Node: Capability Negotiation105317
+Node: Route Reflector108605
+Node: Route Server108870
+Node: Multiple instance109928
+Node: BGP instance and view111741
+Node: Routing policy113107
+Node: Viewing the view113863
+Node: How to set up a 6-Bone connection114135
+Node: Dump BGP packets and table115507
+Node: VTY shell116037
+Node: Filtering116877
+Node: IP Access List117225
+Node: IP Prefix List117616
+Node: ip prefix-list description120785
+Node: ip prefix-list sequential number control121318
+Node: Showing ip prefix-list121843
+Node: Clear counter of ip prefix-list122926
+Node: Route Map123347
+Node: Route Map Command123848
+Node: Route Map Match Command124051
+Node: Route Map Set Command124659
+Node: IPv6 Support125517
+Node: Router Advertisement126082
+Node: Kernel Interface126413
+Node: SNMP Support128363
+Node: How to get ucd-snmp128992
+Node: SMUX configuration130040
+Node: Zebra Protocol130473
+Node: Packet Binary Dump Format132367
+Node: Command Index143934
+Node: VTY Key Index173652
+
+End Tag Table
diff --git a/doc/zebra.texi b/doc/zebra.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d09ff4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/zebra.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+\input texinfo @c -*- texinfo -*-
+@c %**start of header
+@setchapternewpage odd
+@settitle GNU Zebra
+@setfilename zebra.info
+@defcodeindex op
+@synindex pg cp
+@c %**end of header
+
+@c Set variables
+@set EDITION 0.1
+@set VERSION 0.93b
+@set UPDATED 12 September 2002
+@set UPDATED-MONTH September 2002
+
+@c These may vary with installation environment.
+@set INSTALL_PREFIX_ETC /usr/local/etc
+@set INSTALL_PREFIX_SBIN /usr/local/sbin
+
+@c Info entry
+@dircategory Routing Software:
+@direntry
+* Zebra: (zebra).		The @sc{gnu} Zebra routing software
+@end direntry
+
+@c @smallbook
+
+@ifinfo
+This file documents the @sc{gnu} Zebra software which manages common
+TCP/IP routing protocols.
+
+This is Edition @value{EDITION}, last updated @value{UPDATED} of
+@cite{The GNU Zebra Manual}, for Zebra Version @value{VERSION}.
+
+Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Kunihiro Ishiguro
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+
+@ignore
+Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
+results, provided the printed document carries a copyright permission
+notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
+
+@end ignore
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
+except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation
+approved by Kunihiro Ishiguro.
+@end ifinfo
+
+@titlepage
+@title GNU Zebra
+@subtitle A routing software package for TCP/IP networks
+@subtitle Zebra version @value{VERSION}
+@subtitle @value{UPDATED-MONTH}
+@author Kunihiro Ishiguro
+
+@page
+@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
+Copyright @copyright{} 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Kunihiro Ishiguro
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
+except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
+by Kunihiro Ishiguro.
+@end titlepage
+@page
+
+@ifnottex
+@node Top, Overview, (dir), (dir)
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@top Zebra
+		     
+Zebra is a advanced routing software package that provides TCP/IP
+based routing protocols.  This is the Zebra Manual for
+zebra-@value{VERSION}.
+@end ifnottex
+
+@menu
+* Overview::                    
+* Installation::                
+* Basic commands::              
+* Zebra::                       
+* RIP::                         
+* RIPng::                       
+* OSPFv2::                      
+* OSPFv3::                      
+* BGP::                         
+* VTY shell::                       
+* Filtering::                   
+* Route Map::                   
+* IPv6 Support::                
+* Kernel Interface::            
+* SNMP Support::                
+* Zebra Protocol::              
+* Packet Binary Dump Format::   
+* Command Index::               
+* VTY Key Index::               
+@end menu
+
+@include overview.texi
+@include install.texi
+@include basic.texi
+@include main.texi
+@include ripd.texi
+@include ripngd.texi
+@include ospfd.texi
+@include ospf6d.texi
+@include bgpd.texi
+@include vtysh.texi
+@include filter.texi
+@include routemap.texi
+@include ipv6.texi
+@include kernel.texi
+@include snmp.texi
+@include protocol.texi
+@include appendix.texi
+
+@node Command Index, VTY Key Index, Top, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@unnumbered Command Index
+
+@printindex fn
+
+@node VTY Key Index,  , Command Index, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@unnumbered VTY Key Index
+
+@printindex ky
+
+@summarycontents
+@contents
+@bye